JP2021106985A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To solve the problem of a decrease in interest in a game when a game performance results in a jackpot relatively disadvantageous to a player while interest in a game is enhanced when a game performance having high jackpot reliability is executed in a game machine although a player's interest in a game when a game performance having a high jackpot reliability is executed is enhanced and interest in a game is enhanced further when an advantageous jackpot occurs since game performances (ready-to-win performances, character performances, and the like) include plural game performances in different execution modes, and different jackpot reliability is shown depending on a game performance to be executed.SOLUTION: A game machine for executing a game performance for enhancing interest in a game is provided in the game machine having various game performances.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

A conventional gaming machine has a plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode being executed is changed depending on the result of a determination executed at a predetermined time during the game, the number of times of variable display of a symbol reaches a specific number, and the like. Let me. Then, depending on the effect mode to be executed, there are some that execute a game effect (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) of a different effect mode.

For example, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, a normal effect mode and a special effect mode can be set as the effect mode, and a gaming machine that performs a special effect in a different effect mode depending on which effect mode is set. Has been described.

JP-A-2014-166429

In a gaming machine having a plurality of effect modes and executing different game effects depending on the effect mode to be executed, the burden of control processing when executing the game effect increases, and the control process of the game machine It was not optimal, and there was room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having various gaming effects, which performs optimal effect control processing and enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered, and a special game execution means.
It is a game machine equipped with a game production execution means capable of executing a game production.
The game effect includes a specific advance effect that notifies the feasibility of the special game and an additional effect that is executed together with the specific advance effect.
As the specific notice effect, it has three or more specific notice effects.
The specific advance notice effect can be individually executed according to the variable display of the identification information, and a plurality of the specific advance notice effects can be executed according to the variable display of the identification information.
In either case, the specific advance notice effect is individually executed according to the variable display of the identification information, or a plurality of the specific advance notice effects are executed according to the variable display of the identification information. Along with the execution of the specific notice effect, the common additional effect is executed,
The larger the number of the specific advance notice effects executed in association with the variable display of the identification information, the higher the possibility that the special game can be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a specific advance notice effect for notifying the feasibility of the special game and an additional effect to be executed together with the specific advance notice effect. There are three or more types of specific advance notice effects, and each of the three or more specific advance notice effects can be executed individually, and a plurality of specific notice effects can be executed. In the case of doing so, a common additional effect is executed together with the specific advance effect. In addition, the greater the number of specific advance notice effects to be executed, the higher the possibility that the special game can be executed. As a result, the player only needs to know the number of specific advance notice effects to be executed, and it becomes easy to grasp the feasibility of the special game. In addition, since the specific advance notice effect is executed with a common additional effect, the player can easily grasp which effect is the specific advance notice effect and can easily grasp the feasibility of the special game. Become.

Further, the gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention.
The specific advance notice effect is characterized in that it is executed at different timings according to the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, three or more specific advance notice effects are executed at different timings according to the variable display of the identification information. As a result, when a plurality of specific advance notice effects are executed, the start timings of the plurality of specific advance notice effects are not the same, so that it is possible to easily grasp the execution of the player, the specific advance notice effect, and the additional effect. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the feasibility of the special game.

Further, the gaming machine of the third invention is the gaming machine of the first invention or the second invention.
If the number of the specific advance notice effects executed is the same as the variable display of the identification information, the possibility of the special game being the same regardless of the type or combination of the specific advance notice effects is the same. It is characterized by showing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the number of executions is the same with the variable display of the identification information, the specific advance notice effect to be executed is not limited to the type or combination of the specific advance notice effects. The same possibility shall be shown as the feasibility of the special game. As a result, the player does not need to grasp the special game executable feasibility of each specific advance notice effect when a plurality of specific advance notice effects are executed, and does not need to grasp the special game execution feasibility by the combination. By simply recognizing the number of specific advance notice effects to be executed, it is possible to easily understand the degree of feasibility of special game execution.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the production start processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as a notice effect. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as a notice effect. It is a flowchart of execution processing such as a rehearsal effect. It is a flowchart of the variation production end processing. It is a flowchart of a special game production selection process. It is a flowchart of an ending effect selection process. It is a table which shows the notice decision table for a low load state. It is a table which shows the notice decision table for a high load state. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as the advance notice effect of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as the advance notice effect of Example 2. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the gaming machine which concerns on Example 2. It is a flowchart of the special game effect selection process of Example 3. It is a flowchart of the ending effect selection process of Example 3. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing of Example 4. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of another aspect 1. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of another aspect 2. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 6. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 6. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 7.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a game. It is detachably configured from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and are configured to be openable and closable, respectively.

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (It is also simply referred to as "directing button 63"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. good.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side. An image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) on which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect symbol display area 7b is composed of, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variation display of the first special symbol and the result of the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit") (that is, the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct). (Simply referred to as "win / fail judgment") is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with the same three-digit doublet (also referred to as “hit effect symbol”) such as “777”.

In addition, in the case of a small hit, it is possible to stop and display the production symbol with a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit production symbol"). Is. In addition, in the case of deviation, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" may be stopped and displayed with a different pattern (also referred to as "off effect symbol"). It is possible. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. The effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is observed and grasped. It is not necessary to separately provide the positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas may be used as the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). .. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, there is a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, and the like. In addition, a control unit that controls the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the effect symbol, and a display unit that displays the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the effect symbol are referred to as an "identification information display unit". Also called.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, a hit game effect executed in association with the hit game and a waiting for customers are used. Demo production etc. are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demo production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold, which will be described later, is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the number of stored first special figure hold and the second feature displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member falls downward with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting, and the movable decoration The member covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the member becomes visible. As a result, the player will have a higher expectation for hitting. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (first special symbol is correct or not). Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

Below the first starting port 20, a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port”) including a variable second starting port 21 that changes the ease of entering the game ball is provided. .. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the accuracy of the second special symbol is determined (the second special symbol is determined to be correct or not). ) Is executed, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first mode. be. The movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a “first variable ball entrance”) provided with a first big winning opening 30 is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable entry port 31 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32. It can be changed to.

Further, in the game area 3, above the first large winning opening 30, and at the lower right of the center decoration 10, the second large winning device 36 provided with the second large winning opening 35 (“the second variable entry opening”). ") Is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 37, and opens and closes the second special winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

That is, the second variable entry port 36 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. It can be changed to. The second special winning device 36 is formed with a specific area 39 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 35 can pass. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the high probability state described later is generated based on the detection that the gaming ball that has entered the second major winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39. That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variation operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first large winning device 31.

A gate 28 (game ball passage port) through which the game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, it is normally determined whether or not to open the second starting port 21. As the symbol winning / failing determination is executed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, a plurality of general entrances 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3.

The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit, and a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called a right-handed hit. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game is started, a left-handed hit is aimed at entering the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first start opening 20, the gate 28, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second start opening 20 are hit right. The aim is to enter the large winning opening 35. Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening, the second start opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, and the general entry opening, each entry opening is predetermined. A number of game balls (also called "prize balls") are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) that displays a variable display and a stop display of a normal symbol are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of (2 special figure hold), and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. When the result is a hit, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the state should be left-handed or should be left-handed. The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed, and the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 by the stopped displayed special symbol (stop symbol). The result of the lottery based on (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery) will be notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as stopped is used. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is the first big hit (15R big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When a small hit occurs, the four "mnop" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, the light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on as described above.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquisition information”” such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct is based on the entry of the game ball. (Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 85a as the first special figure hold, and if the ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special figure is reserved. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a hold. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is correct for the incoming ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●".

Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds 1 to 1. No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. It should be noted that the off-normal symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and various acquired information is acquired. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the variation display of the normal symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number up to a predetermined number.

Then, the number of such a normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. be. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”, which is also referred to as a “game control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol winning / failing determination, a normal symbol winning / failing determination, and a transition of a game state. ”), Sub-control board 90 (also referred to as“ sub-control unit ”and also referred to as“ effect control unit ”) that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and payout control that controls the payout of the game ball. Board 110 (also referred to as "payout control unit"), effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, symbol displayed on the effect display 102, effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a, and effect 2 special figure. It includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) and the like that control the display of the hold display 103b and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with a storage case for an image control board or the like that houses the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and the sub control board that houses the sub control board 90 is stored on the storage case for the image control board or the like. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and general sensors. The entry sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The general ball entry sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36.

Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal diagram. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a launch direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is stored in a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (a prepaid card (game value storage medium) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserted). (A device that enables ball lending based on the information provided) is connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launch device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 rotates the launch handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the effect 1 special figure hold display 103a, and the effect 2 hold display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, hold symbols, etc.). And image data such as background images are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and turns on / off the two LEDs or combines colors to produce the effect symbol. Stop display is performed in a display mode showing the display result of 8 (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination). Further, the effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a and the effect 2 hold indicator 103b are also composed of two LEDs in the same manner. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the effect 1st special figure hold indicator 103a is displayed on the 1st effect hold display area 9c by the number of holds and the 1st special figure hold indicator 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds to be displayed. Further, the effect second special figure hold indicator 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Be controlled. In this method, the character symbol is displayed on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated to display the character symbol on substantially the entire effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display unit) on the display screen 7a. By covering the effect symbol, the first effect hold display unit, or a part or all of the second effect hold display unit may not be visible, such a display is provided. .. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) are performed. The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 such as the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the hit / fail determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, there are "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are multiple types of hits. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits include "15R (round) first big hit", "15R second big hit", "2R third big hit", and "15R fourth big hit". In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 4th jackpot", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times, and it is the first round. In the second round, it is a big hit that opens the second big winning opening 35 in a manner that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (easily). The round aiming at the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 can be called a chance round or a challenge round. "15R 2nd big hit" is the first round, which is the above-mentioned chance round, although the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times. The opening time of the second round is extremely short (opening and closing for a moment), and it is a big hit that makes it difficult (or even impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. That is, it can be said that this "15R second big hit" is a big hit that does not open the second big winning device 36 in a manner in which the game ball can pass through (easily) the specific area 39. In "2R 3rd big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 2 times, and the 1st round and the 2nd round which are chance rounds. This is a big hit that opens the second big winning device 36 in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. However, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds even if the first round and the second round are combined, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area is lower than that of the 15R first big hit. It has become.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the high probability state described later. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is the above-mentioned 15R 1st jackpot, 2R 3rd jackpot, or 15R 4th jackpot, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area is relatively high. Since the second round and the second chance round are executed, the game state after the big hit game can be shifted to the high probability state by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the big hit game. .. On the other hand, in the case of the 15R second big hit, the opening time of each of the first round and the second round chance round is 0.1 second, so the game ball is put into the second big winning opening. Since it is very difficult to make the game ball pass through the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is the normal state (low probability state) described later. It is very likely that it will be (it can be said that it will be in a low probability state).

On the other hand, the small hit is a hit that opens the big winning opening (the second big winning opening 35) in the same opening pattern as the 2R third big hit. That is, in the small hit, the second big winning device 36 is opened in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. However, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the small hit game, the game state after the execution of the small hit game is not changed from that before the execution of the small hit game. Therefore, if the gaming state before the execution of the small hit game is the normal state (low probability state), the gaming state after the execution of the small hit game is also the normal state. From the player's point of view, the above-mentioned 2R 3rd big hit and small hit cannot be distinguished from each other even by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is the 2R third big hit or the small hit. Therefore, even if the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game as the 2R third big hit, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. Further, even if the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game as a small hit, it is difficult to recognize whether the subsequent game state remains in the normal state or shifts to the high probability state. Is. As a result, in the case of a small hit or a 2R third big hit, it is possible to proceed with the game with the expectation that it may be in a high probability state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. can. In the case of small hits, the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened.

More specifically, the opening pattern of the big winning opening when each big hit and small hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is as shown in FIG. That is, when the 15R first jackpot is reached (when the 15R first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), and when the 15R fourth jackpot is reached (on the second special symbol display 41b). (When the 15R 4th big hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the 2nd big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 1R to 2R, and the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. .. In this case, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st R and the 2nd R is 28 seconds each, it is easy to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round.

In addition, when the 15R second big hit is reached (when the 15R second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second big winning opening 35 is 0.1 at maximum from 1R to 2R. Open for a maximum of 28 seconds from the first big winning opening 30 from 3R to 15R. In this case, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is set to a maximum of 0.1 seconds, which is an extremely short time (opening and closing for a moment), so that the game ball goes to the specific area 39 during the round. It is almost impossible to pass through.

That is, the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot is different from the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot in the opening modes of the first round and the second round. That is, in the 15R first big hit, since the second big winning opening 35 opens for 28 seconds in the first and second rounds, the game ball easily enters the second big winning opening 35. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 will pass through the specific area 39 with high possibility. On the other hand, in the 15R second big hit, the second big winning opening 35 opens only 0.1 seconds in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the 15R second jackpot is considerably lower than that of the 15R first jackpot. Further, since the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is infinitely close to 0, it may be said that the game ball does not pass through.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the 2R 3rd jackpot is won (when the 2R 3rd jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the 1st special symbol display 41a), the 2nd jackpot 35 from 1R to 2R Is released for up to 0.9 seconds. In this case, since the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, one gaming ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds, it is sufficiently possible to insert the game ball into the second large winning opening 35. In addition, since the total opening time of the 2nd big prize opening is as short as 1.8 seconds in this 2R 3rd big hit, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls (game profit) as other 15R big hits. That is, it is a big hit that can hardly get a prize ball compared to other big hits.

In addition, when it becomes the first small hit (when the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when it becomes the second small hit (the second special symbol display 41b). When the second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the second large winning opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening pattern as the 2R 3rd big hit. Even in this small hit, since the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39. However, as described above, there is no change in the game state before and after the small hit game even if the specific area 39 is passed. In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds for this small hit, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls as the 2R third big hit. That is, the small hit has almost no privilege for the player (only the prize ball by entering the ball) in terms of the transition of the game state and the prize ball.
That is, in this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second winning opening 35, the first opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easy to pass) and (15 first jackpot, 15R fourth jackpot). A second open pattern in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 39 (impossible to pass) (15R second jackpot), and a second open pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area and is less likely to pass than the first open pattern. It can have 3 open patterns and (2R 3rd jackpot). Further, as an opening pattern for small hits, it is assumed that the game ball has a fourth opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 but does not give a privilege (does not generate a high probability state) even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39. can do. As another aspect, the fourth opening pattern may be an opening pattern that cannot pass through the specific region 39.

The probability of distribution to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 50% for the 15R second jackpot, and 10% for the 2R third jackpot. There is. On the other hand, the big hits in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are all 15R fourth big hits. That is, when a big hit is made based on the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the second starting port 21, which is easy to enter due to the operation of the opening extension function (occurrence of a high base state) described later, the 15R fourth jackpot is always made. It becomes. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than being a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (big hit lottery of the first special symbol) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that it is more likely that the player will be advantageous if the ball hits the ball in the winning / failing judgment (the big hit lottery of the second special symbol). That is, the player plays the game in anticipation of entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly remarkable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. In addition to the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number and the jackpot type determination random number, the random number (acquisition information) acquired based on the entry into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes a "reach random number". (Also referred to as "reach information") "and" variable pattern random number (also referred to as "variable pattern information") ".

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a reach in a game effect (effect symbol game effect) that indicates the result by using the effect symbol when the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination is wrong. Reach means, for example, a state in which two left and right effect symbols 8R and 8L are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same symbol, and the remaining one medium effect symbol 8C is changing (“7 ↓ 7”). Status). Then, if the changing medium effect symbol 8C stops at the same symbol as the stopped effect symbols 8R and 8L, the three effect symbols stop at the same symbol, which is a hit. The stop (temporary stop) of the effect symbol in this case also includes a display (sway fluctuation) that seems to be slightly shaken in the effect symbol display area 7b. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 126.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (ordinary symbol lottery). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states by a combination in which each function of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the open extension function for the special symbol and the normal symbol is in the activated state or the non-activated state. .. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is operating is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is called a "normal state (also called a" low probability state "). ". In the high probability state, the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing judgment is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the normal state, but in the high probability state, the jackpot judgment table for the high probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged as the jackpot is large is used. It is used to determine whether or not it is correct (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated.

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective entry into the starting port (entry ball that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbol. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed using the normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) judged to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state. (See FIG. 8 (D)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Also, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. That is, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the non-time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation once for 0.2 seconds, and the second starting port is opened during that period. Become. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared with the case where these functions are not operating. Therefore, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

The high base state (high frequency state) does not have to activate all the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22, the function is not activated. However, it suffices if the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game in the case of the 15R first big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. In addition, the special symbol is in a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy and high base state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the jackpot is executed and the jackpot game is executed.

Further, in the game state after the special game in the case of the 15R second big hit, it is extremely difficult to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game. Moreover, it becomes a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy and high base state". The low-accuracy high-base state ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display of a special symbol is executed, or when a big hit is won and the big hit game is executed. The possibility is extremely low, but if it passes through the specific area 39, it will be in a “high accuracy and high base state”.

Further, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the game state after the special game when the 2R third big hit is made is the height of the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a stochastic state, a non-time saving state of a special symbol, and a low base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy and low base state". The high-accuracy-low-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the jackpot is executed and the jackpot game is executed.

This high-probability low-base state is a state in which the high-probability state is latent, that is, the high-probability state is difficult for the player to recognize. That is, the high probability low base state is a so-called "latent probability change state (also referred to as" probability non-notification state ")". On the other hand, the above-mentioned high-probability high-base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high-probability state. That is, the high-accuracy high-base state is the so-called "probability-changing game state".

Further, in the high base state, the game state after the special game when the 2R third big hit is made is a high probability state of the special symbol and the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a time saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). That is, the time saving function and the base state of the special symbol are the same as the state before the execution of the special game.

When playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal state of the special symbol, a non-time saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B by right-handed striking. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it has become. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) rather than hitting left. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify the right gaming area that the launch should be performed.

On the other hand, in a low base state such as a high accuracy low base state or a low accuracy low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A by hitting the left side. Further, in the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the first starting port 20 than to enter the ball into the second starting port 21. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) rather than hitting right. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing direction indicator 47 should be launched to the left game area.

Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 38. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets. And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In Example 1 and the drawings, the normal symbol is "general diagram", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" and "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by the 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), the normal symbol operation process (S205), the special symbol operation process (S206), and the specific area sensor detection process (S207), which will be described later. , Hold ball number processing (S208), and power failure monitoring processing (S209) are executed. After that, other processing (S210) not deeply related to the present invention is executed to end the interrupt processing (S105). Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec). ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). .. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of normal figure hold provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not the number is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), proceed to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol holding balls in the normal symbol holding storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but if the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the special figure 2 The number of reserved balls (the number of 2nd special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of 2nd special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (upper limit number). Whether or not it is determined (S306). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than four (NO in S306), Special figure 2 Add 1 to the number of reserved balls (S307).

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (A)). The acquired random number values (acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). ). If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends, but if the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of 1st special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of 1st special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (upper limit number). Whether or not it is determined (S310). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 reaches four (YES in S310), the process ends, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than four (NO in S310), Special figure 1 Add "1" to the number of reserved balls (S311).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), value of random number counter for determining jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), value of reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), value of fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (That is, the random number values shown in FIG. 7A are acquired), and the acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the first special figure 1 in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a. ..

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 after the start port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal figure operation process (S205), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The operation status of the normal diagram is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). This process is finished. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / miss determination process described later is performed (S502). Further, following the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (E) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. Further, following the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / miss judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in the time saving state (YES in S602), among the normal symbol hit judgment tables shown in FIG. 8 (D), the table for the time saving state (the hit judgment value is Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail determination based on "0" to "239"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, when it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (D) ( It is determined whether or not the hit is a hit (S603) by the low-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the hit judgment values "0" and "1"), and the process proceeds to S605.
Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be wrong (NO in S605), the stop display is lost. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary symbol) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal symbol hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift processing]
Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not, the process ends (NO in S801). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802) and the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal symbol at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not (S804), this process is performed. To finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal map hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern in the time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the set of the open pattern (S903, S906), the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 is completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), if not (NO in S1003), the process is completed, and if it is reached, the second The start port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, the opening of the second starting port 21 and then a predetermined opening). Judging (whether or not the time has passed) (S1005), if not reached (NO in S1005), the process is completed, and if it is reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed) (closed). S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing per normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag per normal figure is set (S1010) to end the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the non-time reduction state, and is set to "0" in the non-time reduction state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag for hitting the normal figure is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed, so that the hit in the normal figure is hit. The end flag is turned off (S1011), the normal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) after the normal figure operation process (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, the processes related to the special symbol display 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) are divided into five stages, and these are divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage of. Then, when the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101). NO, YES for S1103), processing during special symbol change (S1104) is performed, and if the "special symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105), the special symbol is confirmed. If processing (S1106) is performed and the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) as a jackpot game. If the "special figure operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is “0” (S1201). .. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second starting port 21 is not stored, the first start is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is “0” (S1206). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20 is not stored, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the process of using the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers) is in progress (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process is completed. If not (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, when there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. , The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) are performed in this order. Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21. Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / miss judgment process (S1207) and the special figure 1 variation described later will be described. The pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the first embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is "0" (when YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). Then, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit that is more profitable for the player than the hit / fail judgment based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8 (B). )).

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest region of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first one of the second special figure hold). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the oldest stored) stored in the corresponding RAM area) is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not in the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state (the jackpot determination values are "3" and "" in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A)). A hit / fail judgment is made based on 397 ”) (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), the hit / fail judgment is performed based on the big hit determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1307). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

When the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1309) is determined to be "big hit" (YES in S1304), the value (label-TRND-AS) of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type is read out and shown in FIG. 8 (B). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table (S1310), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1312), and the process is completed. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), any one of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit, and the 2R third big hit is executed. Further, when the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, all of them are 15R fourth big hits (FIG. 8 (B)).

Further, the big hit flag includes a long hit flag that is turned on when the type of big hit is 15R first big hit or 15R second big hit, and a short hit flag that is turned on when the type of big hit is 2R third big hit. Here, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 2R lamp and a 15R lamp, and when the 2R third jackpot is set and the short hit flag is turned ON, the 2R third jackpot symbol is displayed. The 2R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Further, when the long hit flag is turned on as any of the 15R 1st jackpot, the 15R 2nd jackpot, and the 15R 4th jackpot, the 15R lamp lights up at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "2R Δ15R ▲".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1307) is not "big hit" (NO in S1304), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1305). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches any of the small hit determination values "101" to "105" (FIG. 8 (A)). .. Then, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (NO in S1305), the out-of-order symbol is determined (S1308), and the process is completed. If it is determined to be a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1306), and the process is completed. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not it is a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) after the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). Then, if it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), it is a medium jackpot in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the table (the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) (S1403). .. If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, the non-time saving medium big hit table is divided according to whether the big hit is a long hit (15R big hit) or a short hit (2R big hit). However, since this process is a variable pattern selection process for the special figure 2, the big hit won in the lottery of the special figure 2 is only the 15R fourth big hit (long hit). Therefore, the portion referred to in this process is always the location of the long hit, and the fluctuation pattern P1 or the fluctuation pattern P2 is selected. The table for medium and large hits in the non-time saving state does not have to be divided into a long hit table and a short hit table. This also applies to the table for medium and large hits in a time-saving state, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the variation is made with reference to the non-time saving state medium / small hit table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and small hit). Pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern P4 is always selected.

If the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is the reach establishment random number value (S1406). As shown in FIG. 8C, the reach establishment random number values are “0” to “5” in the time saving state and “0” to “13” in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when the time is off than the non-time-saving state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure hold by allowing more non-reach effect deviations with a short fluctuation time to be selected in the time saving state.

When the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is the reach establishment random number value (YES in S1406), that is, when the reach is out of reach, the table for out of reach in the non-time saving state (variation shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the non-time saving state and the portion corresponding to the reach / non-reach state in the pattern table (S1407). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P5 or P6 is selected.

If the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S1406), that is, if there is no reach, the table for no reach loss during the non-time saving state (variation pattern shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the non-time saving state and the part corresponding to the reach non-existence in the table (S1408). When this reach does not come off, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2" is selected. It is supposed to be done. In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P7 or P8 is selected.

Further, in S1401, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is the table for the time saving state (the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The process (S1410 to S1416) is performed in the same flow as in steps S1402 to S1609 except that the part corresponding to the time saving state) is set. That is, if it is a big hit, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and the big hit in FIG. 9, if it is a small hit, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and the small hit in FIG. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and reach non-off in FIG. 9, and refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and reach non-off in FIG. 9 if there is no reach. And select the fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls when the reach is not off is the number of reserved balls "2". ~ Works when "4". That is, the shortening variation is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. Further, when the long hit is won among the big hits, the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern table in the time saving state is a table in which the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table in the non-time saving state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, another process (S1404) shown in FIG. 23 is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is one lower side (for example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 21, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206). , Special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), the processes (S1601 to S1609) are performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. 22. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

However, since this process is related to the special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure hold storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, in the type determination of the jackpot in S1608, there is a possibility that any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, and the 2R third jackpot is determined (FIG. 8 (B)). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in FIG. 8B, the distribution rate of each jackpot is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 50% for the 15R second jackpot, and 2R third jackpot. Is 10%. When it is determined as the 15R first jackpot or the 15R second jackpot in the jackpot type determination, the long hit flag is turned ON as the jackpot flag in step S1609. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R third big hit, the short hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1609.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1720) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

However, since this process is related to Special Figure 1, if YES in S1702 (Fig. 27) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R first jackpot). It is determined whether or not it is one of the two big hits (S1703). If it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1703), refer to the 15R jackpot table in the non-time saving state (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and the long hit), and the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P1 or the fluctuation pattern P2 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1703 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1703), that is, when it is a 2R third jackpot, the 2R jackpot table in the non-time saving state (the non-time saving state and the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the part corresponding to the short hit (S1706). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P3 is selected.

Further, in this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process, even when YES in S1712 (FIG. 28) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R second jackpot). (S1713). Then, in the case of a 15R jackpot (YES in S1713), the fluctuation pattern random number counter is referred to in the 15R jackpot table in the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state and the long hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on the value (S1714). Specifically, any of the fluctuation patterns P9 to P11 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1713 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1713), that is, when it is a 2R third jackpot, the 2R jackpot table in the time saving state (the time saving state and the short hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to (the part corresponding to) (S1715). Specifically, the variation pattern P12 is selected.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after the variation pattern is selected (S1704, S1706, S1709, S1710, S1711, S1714, S1715, S1718, S1719, S1720), other processes (S1705, FIG. 27) are performed. To finish this process. In the other processing (S1705), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the first special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (S1904). S1905). When the probability change counter is determined to be "0" in S1905, the probability change flag is turned off and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

Then, in S1907, when it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907) and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time saving for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. The counter value is subtracted by 1 (S1908), it is determined whether or not the time saving counter value is "0" (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), the time saving flag is turned off (S1910). Proceed to the processing of S1911. Further, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol winning / failing determination random number and the big hit type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is completed.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot, or 15R fourth jackpot) (S2002). ..

And if it is a 15R jackpot (that is, if the long hit flag is ON), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening one round once, one round is from opening the big winning opening to closing). The value of the round counter that counts the number of times is set to "15", and as an opening pattern of the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36), if it is the 15R first big hit, the 15R first An opening pattern for a big hit (see FIG. 6) is set, and if it is a 15R second big hit, an opening pattern for a 15R second big hit (see FIG. 6) is set (S2003).

If it is not a 15R jackpot in S2002 (that is, if the short hit flag is ON), the jackpot type is 2R second jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "2" and the jackpot prize device (first jackpot). As the opening pattern of the winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36), the opening pattern for the 2R second big hit (see FIG. 6) is set (S2004).

After finishing the processing of S2003 or S2004, in order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (S2005), the opening effect of the big hit game is started (S2006), and the special figure operation status is set to "4". (S2007).

Further, when it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2008). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2008), the value of the small hit opening counter that counts the number of times the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is opened during the small hit game is set to "2". At the same time, an opening pattern for small hits (see FIG. 6) is set as an opening pattern of the large winning devices (first large winning device 31 and second large winning device 36) (S2009).

After finishing the processing of S2009, in order to start the small hit game, the opening command of the small hit is set (S2010), the opening production of the small hit game is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to "5". Set (S2012). If the small hit flag is not ON in S2008 (NO in S2008), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game will start, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" and the process is completed.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined to be ON (YES in S2101), the probability change flag is turned OFF. (S2102). Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In the first embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all of the jackpot winning devices (first jackpot winning device 31 and second jackpot winning device 36) have been opened (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is determined whether or not the jackpot (first jackpot 30 or second jackpot 35) is open (S2106). If it is not open (NO in S2106), it is time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the big hit has passed 1 It is determined whether or not the time to start the round has been reached, or the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and the time to start the next round (next open) has been reached (S2107).

If the judgment result of S2107 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2107 is YES, it is determined whether or not the executed round corresponds to either the first round or the second round (S2108). This may be determined by using the value of the round counter for each jackpot type, or may be determined by providing a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed separately. If neither the first round nor the second round (ie, any of the 3rd to 15th rounds) (NO in S2108), proceed to S2110 and follow the opening pattern according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 6). The first big winning opening 30 is opened. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the first round or the second round (YES in S2108), the V validity period setting process (S2109) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2110, and the opening pattern according to the type of jackpot (Fig. 6). Refer to) to open the second prize opening 35.

In the V validity period setting process (S2109), the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the opening of the second special winning opening 35 and for several seconds after the closing of the second special winning opening 35 in the first or second round. Set to the period for determining validity (corresponding to the first period). In the first embodiment, the period other than this (including during a small hit or when the special game is not executed) is a period (corresponding to the second period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Is set to. Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later). (Refer to steps S2401 to S2403), and determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned on even if the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is detected. Is.

Here, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state. Is notified. Specifically, the game status indicator 46 is composed of three LEDs of "a1a2a3". Then, in the first embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode is "a1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■". Then, when the big hit game is completed and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □". Further, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode of "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" remains. , "A1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" may be displayed at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" may be displayed at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. ..

That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned on outside the V valid period (V invalid). The V flag is not turned on when the V passage is detected (during the period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (game state setting process (FIG. 33) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to the high probability state.

In addition, if there is a V pass at the 1st or 2R in the 15R 1st jackpot or the 2R 3rd jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a high probability state, while the V passage occurs during the small hit. Even if there is, if the game state before the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the small hit game is also set to the normal state so that the winning / failing determination probability does not change before and after the big hit game.

In the first embodiment, in the V validity period setting process (S2109), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is set to the period (first period) that is determined to be effective even when the 15R second jackpot is hit. However, as another aspect, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the first period may not be set at the 1st and 2nd rounds. That is, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the 1st and 2nd Rs may be set as the second period. In the big hit game related to the 15R second big hit, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is set to 0.1 seconds, which is an extremely short time, so there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the second big winning opening 35. It is extremely low, but if you set it in the second period, you will not turn on the V flag even if you should hit the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally or the V flag from being turned on due to a rare entry. In this embodiment, the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is enabled in the first round or the second round, but the location of the round is not limited to this.

If the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open in S2106 (YES in S2106), the maximum number of balls that can be entered in the big winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls. It is determined whether or not (10 pieces per round in the first embodiment) has been reached (S2111). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2111), has it reached the time to close the big prize opening (that is, has the predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) passed since the big winning opening was opened? Whether or not) is determined (S2112). Then, if the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when the specified number of balls has been reached (YES in S2111) or when the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), that is, one of the two round end conditions is satisfied. If this happens, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is closed (S2113). Then, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined that it is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined to be "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) and the jackpot ending effect is started (S2117) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2118), and the process is completed. If the round counter is a long hit (15R big hit), it will be "0" if the big winning opening is opened 15 times, and if it is a short hit (2R big hit), the big winning opening will be opened twice. When executed, it becomes "0".

If the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether or not the execution time of the jackpot ending effect has elapsed (S2119), and the ending time has elapsed. If not (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2119), after turning off the jackpot end flag (S2120), the game state setting process (S2121) described later is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2123), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later. Then, if the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), "140" is set in the probability change counter (S2203), the V flag is turned OFF (S2204), and the processing of S2205 is performed. move on. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is turned ON in this gaming state setting process.

On the other hand, if the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the time reduction flag is turned ON (S2209), the time reduction counter is set to "100" (S2210), and the process is completed without turning the probability change flag ON. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a low probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state). In this low-accuracy high-based state, the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times (the total number of variation display times of the first special symbol and the variation display count of the second special symbol is 100 times). And the next big hit will occur, and it will end when either of the conditions is met. Further, the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter count the total number of times the fluctuation display number of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol are added.

In S2205, it is determined whether or not the completed jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot. Then, when it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot, that is, it is a 2R third jackpot (NO in S2205), then the gaming state before the jackpot game, that is, the gaming state when the 2R third jackpot is reached is whether or not the time is shortened. (S2208). If it is determined that the time reduction state has not been achieved (NO in S2208), the process ends without turning on the time reduction flag. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability state, a non-time saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state (that is, a high probability low base state). This high-accuracy-low-base state ends when either of the conditions that the special symbol fluctuates 140 times and the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2205 that the completed jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2205), and in S2208, the game state when the 2R third jackpot is reached is in a time-saving state. If it is determined that the time was (YES in S2208), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2206), "140" is set in the time saving counter (S2207), and the process is completed. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability state, a time saving state of the special symbol, and a high base state (that is, a high probability high base state). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either of the conditions that the special symbol fluctuates 140 times and the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

Further, when the 2R third big hit and the V flag is turned ON during the big hit game, it is the big hit game that performs the process (S2208) of determining whether the game state before the big hit game is the time saving state. This is to make the operating state of the front and rear time saving function and the operating state of the high base function the same as the small hit. If these operating states are different between the small hit and the 2R 3rd big hit, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit is due to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, which hit is determined by the subsequent operating state. Because it will be done. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the small hit and the 2R third big hit by the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and also by the operating state of the time saving function and the high base generating function that occur thereafter. If the V flag is simply ON without confirming whether the time reduction state is set, the time reduction flag may be turned ON.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the large winning devices (first large winning device 31 and second large winning device 36) have been opened in the small hit game.

If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), whether the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open (that is, whether the big winning device is open) ) Is determined (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. It is determined whether the time to start the first opening has been reached, or whether the time of the interval between the multiple openings has elapsed and the time to start the next opening has been reached (S2303).

If the judgment result of S2303 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2303 is YES, the V invalid period setting process (S2304) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2305 to open the second large winning opening 35 according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6).

In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated for a few seconds during the opening of the second large winning opening 35 and after the closing of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game. Set to the judgment period (second period). Further, in the first embodiment, a period other than the period specified in the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is set as an invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether the valid period is set, that is, whether the invalid period is set. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80) that measures the passage of the V validity period by countdown is set to "0" (that is, the state without the validity period). do. If the V timer is not "0", set the V timer to "0". It should be noted that the V timer may be set to "0", that is, set to a state without a valid period without confirming whether or not the V timer is "0". As a result, even if V passes during the small hit, if the game state before the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the small hit game is prevented from shifting to the high probability state. In the first embodiment, since the period other than the period specified in the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is the invalid period, the process of S2304 may be omitted.

If the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open in S2302, (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the 2 times opening, that is, 2 It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening of the number of times has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), has it reached the time to close the big prize opening (that is, has the predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) passed since the big winning opening was opened? Whether or not) is determined (S2307). Then, if the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, if the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the two openings has reached the specified number of balls (YES in S2506), the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is closed (2nd large winning opening 35). S2314), shift to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the large winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is closed (S2308). Then, the value of the small hit opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that it is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is terminated as it is in order to start the next opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be "0" in S2310 (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311) and the small hit ending effect is started (S2312). Then, the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the process is completed. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened twice.

In S2301, if the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since the opening of two times has been completed, it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and the ending time. If has not passed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the small hit flag is turned off (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to "1". Set (S2318) and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are not switched from ON to OFF. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 34) is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) and then the specific area sensor detection process (S207). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 35, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401), the process ends. When it is determined that there is detection in S2401 (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is in the V valid period (S2402). The V valid period is a period set in the V valid period setting process (S2109) in the above-mentioned special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 32). The V validity period is set in the first and second rounds of the jackpot game.

If it is determined in S2402 that the V is valid (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the jackpot game currently being executed is a 2R jackpot (2R third jackpot). Is determined (S2404). Then, if it is determined that it is not a 2R jackpot (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R jackpot, the first V pass command is set (S2405), and the process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a 2R jackpot (YES in S2404), the second V pass command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V-pass command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 executes the game effect in the effect symbol display area or the like according to the type of the received V-pass command. ..

If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the third V passage command is set (S2407) without turning on the V flag, and the process ends. The first V-passing command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-passing notification control. On the other hand, the second V-passing command and the third V-passing command are commands for not causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-passing notification control in principle. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 is a means for switching the validity / invalidity of the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 by executing such a specific area sensor detection process (S207) or V validity period setting process (S2109). Functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Holded ball number processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S208) after the specific area sensor detection processing (S207). In the reserved ball number processing (S208), as shown in FIG. 36, first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out (the number of reserved ball number). S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502).

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S209) after the hold ball number process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 37, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is playing a game, the number of reserved balls is some, and the number of remaining fluctuations of the probability change / time reduction is some. Etc.) are stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 47. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 38 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. .. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (at the time of turning on the power), and are not executed after that.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the advance effect that determines the advance effect and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random values one by one at the time of updating, it is possible to add two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In the first embodiment, the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect include a random number for determining the conversation advance notice, a random number for determining the step-up advance notice, a random number for determining the pseudo-variation advance notice, a random number for determining the moving part advance notice, and a random number for determining the advance notification effect. The advance notice effect to be executed is determined by using the acquisition values of the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect and the advance notice determination tables of FIGS. 49 and 50.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. Execute the production (directed design game production, special game production associated with the big hit game and the small hit game, etc.). The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), as shown in FIG. 39, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine if it has been entered (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). .. Subsequently, a lamp data output process for outputting the lamp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is performed (S4202). Next, a drive data output process for creating and outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 is performed (S4203). Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process described later is performed (S4301). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display contents and the like of the display screen 7a is performed based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S4303). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4304).

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in the reception command analysis process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 has received the start input command from the main control board 80 (main control unit) ( S4401), when it is determined that the start ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), then the ball entry start processing (S4402), which will be described later, is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. If it is determined that the start ball entry command has not been received by S4401 (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4403 without performing the effect start process at the time of ball entry.

In S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control unit (S4403), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing described later is performed (S4404). , Move to the processing of S4405. If it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received by S4403 (NO in S4403), the process shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation production start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not there is an unexecuted advance notice effect (game effect) (S4405), and if it is determined that there is an unexecuted advance notice effect (YES in S4405), the advance notice effect, etc. execution process described later is performed. Is performed (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407. If it is determined in S4405 that there is no unexecuted advance notice effect (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without executing the advance notice effect. Here, "not yet executed notice effect, etc." refers to a game effect whose execution timing has not yet arrived, among the advance notice effects, etc. that have been decided to be executed by the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), etc. say. These set game effects that have not been executed will be executed in order when the execution timing determined for each game effect arrives.

In S4407, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control unit (S4407), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4407), the variation effect end processing described later is performed (S4408). Move to S4409 processing. If it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received in S4407 (NO in S4407), the process shifts to the processing of S4409 without performing the fluctuation production end processing.

Subsequently, in S4409, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control unit (S4409), and when it is determined that the opening command has been received (YES in S4409), the special game effect selection process described later is performed (S4410). ), Move to the processing of S4411. If it is determined that the opening command has not been received by S4409 (NO in S4409), the process proceeds to S4411 without performing the special game effect selection process. In S4411, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control unit (S4411), and if it is determined that the ending command has been received (YES in S4411), the ending effect selection process is performed (S4412), and the process of S4413 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4411 that the ending command has not been received (NO in S4411), the process proceeds to S4413 without performing the ending effect selection process.

Subsequently, if it is determined whether or not the first V passage command has been received from the main control unit (S4413) and it is determined that the first V passage command has been received (YES in S4413), the V passage notification command is set (S4414). ), Move to the processing of S4415. The first V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 15R first jackpot. When the V-passage notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) or the like by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads predetermined image information from the ROM of the image control board 100. Then, characters such as "V pass!" Are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As a result, the player is notified that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4413 that the first V passage command has not been received (NO in S4413), the process proceeds to the process of S4415 without setting the V passage notification command.

It should be noted that displaying the character "V passage!" Is one of the V passage notification modes, and other display contents (for example, displaying an object image imitating the character "V" or "probability change GET"". The passage of V may be notified by displaying the characters of, etc.). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the game state after the big hit game (special game) being executed will be a high probability state.

Subsequently, in S4415, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the second V passage command has been received from the main control unit (S4415), and determines that the second V passage command has not been received (NO in S4415). ), Determine whether or not the third V passage command has been received (S4417). Then, when it is determined that the second V passage command has been received in S4415 (YES in S4415) and when it is determined in S4417 that the third V passage command has been received (YES in S4417), V passes. Set the non-notification command (S4416) and move to the processing of S4418. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4417 that the third V passage command has not been received (NO in S4417), the process proceeds to S4418 without setting the V passage non-notification command. In S4418, as other processing, processing based on a reception command other than the above-mentioned command (for example, a normal symbol fluctuation start command or a normal symbol fluctuation stop command) is performed, and the processing is completed. Here, the second V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 2R third big hit. The third V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V invalid period such as during a small hit.

When the V-pass non-notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 or the like by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays "V-pass!" Or the like on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display is controlled on a screen in which there is no display of characters indicating that the V has passed (that is, a screen in which there is no notification of the passage of V). In other words, the V-passing non-notification mode is adopted. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 2R third big hit or small hit, that is not notified to the player.

The command to be set in the above-mentioned specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) may be limited to the first V pass command, and the second V pass command and the third V pass command may not be set. In this case, the received command analysis process (S4301) does not execute the above-mentioned S4415 to S4417. Even with this configuration, the pachinko gaming machine can be used to notify the player only when V has passed during the V valid period in the 15R first jackpot. That is, it is not necessary to set a command (V-passage non-notification command) when the effect for notifying V-passage is not performed. However, it is possible to increase the stability of the image control by setting a command and controlling the image control board 100 based on the command as in this embodiment.

[Production start processing when entering the ball]
The effect start processing (S4402) at the time of ball entry is a process of executing a start ball entry command indicating that the ball has entered the start port from the main control unit. By this process, the image display device 7 Display control (control regarding the number of displays and changes in the display mode of the effect hold) of the effect hold (first effect hold 9a and second effect hold 9b) displayed on the display screen 7a of Occasionally, a so-called look-ahead effect (also referred to as "advance effect" or "advance notice") is performed based on the acquired information acquired by the main control unit. The look-ahead effect is a notice effect for starting the effect (game effect) before starting the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / miss determination. That is, the look-ahead effect is a variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol) that is executed before starting the variation display (also referred to as “the variation”) of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / fail determination. It is executed along with (also called "preliminary fluctuation"). In addition, the advance notice effect (including the look-ahead effect) means that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit (stops and displays in the big hit mode / big hit symbol). It is an effect that shows (suggests) the possibility before the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, in the effect start processing (S4402) at the time of entering the ball, first, the processing of turning on the specific flag is performed in S5001, and the process shifts to the processing of S5002. Here, the "specific flag" of the first embodiment is in a state (high) in which the load of the control processing performed by the sub control unit 90 (also referred to as the "game effect control unit") is relatively high (the amount of control processing is large). It is a flag indicating the load state). Then, this "specific flag" is turned on when the ball entering effect start process is executed, and turned off when the ball entering effect start process is completed. That is, in the first embodiment, the processing amount of the control (effect control process, notice effect control process) related to the game effect of the sub control unit (game effect control unit) is greater than the predetermined amount during the execution of the effect start process at the time of entering the ball. It is said that there are many periods. In the first embodiment, the advance notice determination table used in the setting process such as the advance notice effect, which will be described later, is different depending on the state (ON or OFF) of this "specific flag". The state in which the specific flag is ON is also referred to as a "high load state" or "second control state", and the state in which the specific flag is OFF is also referred to as a "low load state" or "first control state".

Next, in the S5002, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-effect determination random number acquisition process (S5002) for acquiring a pre-effect determination random number for the pre-effect determination, and shifts to the process of S5003. At the timing when the start-in ball command is received from the main control unit 80, the processing of S5002 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from a random number for determining a preliminary effect (not shown). Further, in the pre-effect determination process (S5005) described later, whether or not to execute the pre-effect based on the acquired value, and if it is executed, the execution mode and the like are determined. The S5003 analyzes the start-in ball command received from the main control unit by the effect control microcomputer 91, and shifts to the processing of the S5004. The start-in ball command includes a variation pattern specifying command (information for specifying the variation pattern to be executed) that can specify the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ing. In addition, hold information for designating the number of acquired information (stored number, hold number) stored in the current 1st special figure hold storage unit 85a and 2nd special figure hold storage unit 85b, and the current gaming state are specified. The game state information to be played, the judgment result (preliminary judgment result) of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the symbol information for designating the hit type, and the like are included.

In S5004, a table for determining the pre-effect is set (S5004), and the set pre-effect determination table, the information included in the start entry command, and the random number for pre-effect determination acquired in S5002 are displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-effect, and if so, which effect mode the pre-effect is to be executed (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006.

The S5006 controls the display of the effect hold (first effect hold and second effect hold) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and shifts to the process of S5007. Specifically, the number of acquired information stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is calculated based on the hold information analyzed by the start entry command analysis process (S5003). In order to show the player, control is performed to display the first effect hold and the second effect hold, which indicate the same number as the number of the stored acquired information. As a result, the player can easily grasp the current number of holds.

Further, by changing the display modes of the first effect hold and the second effect hold, or by changing the display modes of the first effect hold and the second effect hold to a special display mode different from the normal display mode. When showing the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol related to the effect hold will be a specific result (big hit) before starting the variable display of the effect symbol (when executing the pre-effect), the effect of S5006 Performs the corresponding display control process in the hold display process.

In S5007, the specific flag is turned off and the production start process at the time of entering the ball is completed. By determining that this specific flag is OFF, it is possible to determine that the effect start processing at the time of entering the ball is not being executed, that is, that the control processing amount related to the game effect performed by the sub control unit is a predetermined amount. It is possible. Here, whether or not "the control processing amount related to the game effect is a predetermined amount" means whether or not the control processing amount is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (the control processing amount is within a predetermined range), and in this embodiment, it is actually Rather than measuring the control processing amount, a specific control process (“production start processing at the time of ball entry” in Example 1) is being executed, which generally increases the control processing amount (also simply referred to as “processing amount”). It is possible to easily judge by judging whether or not it is. Therefore, when a predetermined specific control process is performed, it is considered that "the amount of control process related to the game effect is larger than the predetermined amount", and the corresponding control process for the high load state is executed. do. As another aspect, a measuring means for actually measuring the load of the CPU of the sub-control unit is provided, and when the value (load) measured by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the corresponding high load state is used. It may be the one that executes the control process of.

[Variation production start processing]
As shown in FIG. 45, in the variable effect start process (S4404), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the effect determination random number such as the advance notice effect determination random number and the effect symbol determination random number. Performs acquisition processing (S4501). Specifically, in this embodiment, as the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect, the random numbers for determining the conversation advance notice effect (also referred to as "random numbers for determining the first advance notice effect") and the random numbers for determining the step-up advance notice effect ("random number for determining the second advance notice effect"). Random number for determining pseudo-variation notice (also referred to as "random number for determining third notice effect"), random number for determining moving part notice (also referred to as "random number for determining fourth notice effect"), and advance notification effect decision It has a random number for use (“random number for determining the fifth notice effect”), and at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, the processing of S4501 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is obtained from each random number. Will be acquired. Further, in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506) described later, the advance notice effect or the like to be executed according to the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is determined based on the acquired value.

Next, in S4502, the fluctuation start command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the information for designating the fluctuation pattern includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P17) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. (See FIG. 8). The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as different characters, items, and background images, and the effect symbol game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Further, when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode. In this embodiment, the effect mode A is executed when the low accuracy and low base state is controlled, the effect mode B is executed when the low accuracy and high base state is controlled, and the effect mode C is the high accuracy and high. Executed when controlled to the base state. Therefore, by confirming which of the production modes A to C, the player can grasp the current gaming state.

Further, the effect mode D or the effect mode E is executed when the high accuracy low base state or the low accuracy low base state is controlled. Therefore, when the effect mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, he / she can grasp whether the probability state of the special symbol winning / failing determination is in the high probability state or the low probability state (normal state). It's difficult to do. In that sense, the effect modes D and E can be said to be probability non-notification modes.

Next, in the S4504, for determining the variable effect pattern (also referred to as “effect pattern”) of the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. Set the table (S4504). Specifically, as a table for determining the variation effect pattern, there is an effect symbol variation mode determination table for determining the variation mode of the effect symbol, although not shown, based on the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. Set. In this embodiment, different effect symbol variation mode determination tables are set depending on the game state and the effect mode.

Next, in S4505, based on the variation effect pattern table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and corresponds to the effect mode indicated by the referenced mode status is selected (S4505). Further, in S4505, among the variation effect patterns, the variation mode of the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (the mode of the effect symbol game effect) is mainly determined. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) and when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect and When the character effect is not executed (reach non-effect symbol game effect) is set.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the variation mode of the effect pattern, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, super reach C, and character The effect is set, and in S4505, which of these effects is performed or which of these effects is not performed (this is also referred to as "normal variation") is determined based on the effect symbol variation mode determination table. Will be done.

Then, when the reach effect symbol game effect is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the effect symbol variation mode determination table. In addition, when the reach A, reach B, or reach C (also referred to as "normal reach") is executed in the case where the play effect with reach is executed, the "reach flag" is turned ON and the "super reach flag" is executed. Is turned off, and when super reach A, super reach B, or super reach C is executed, the "super reach flag (also referred to as" SP reach flag ")" is turned on and the "reach flag" is turned off. In addition, when the effect with reach effect symbol game effect is not executed, the "reach flag" and the "super reach flag" are turned off. It is assumed that the state of these flags is determined and the advance notification effect described later is performed.

Here, when the super reach effect is executed as the game effect, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that when the normal reach effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super reach production is a game production having a higher jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot, feasibility of a jackpot game) than the reach (normal reach) production. Next, in S4506, setting processing such as a notice effect described later is performed. In the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), which of the advance notice effect types to be described later is mainly executed among the variable effect patterns based on the effect determination random number acquired in S4501. To determine. In addition, an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as a "stop effect symbol") is determined. By these processes (S4505 and S4506), the variation effect pattern is determined.

Next, in S4507, a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like is set based on the variable effect pattern selected in S4505 and S4506 (S4507), and the variable effect start process is ended. Further, when the variable effect start command set in S4505 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined effect image from the ROM of the image control board 100. It is read out and the effect symbol game effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is doublet of an odd number such as "777" when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is 15R first jackpot, and when it is 15R second jackpot. Is doublet with an even numbered symbol such as "666". In addition, when one of the three production symbols such as "787" is out of reach, one of the three production symbols is different from the other production symbols, and when it is out of reach, three productions such as "635" are produced. At least one of the symbols is selected so that the other effect symbols are different from each other. Further, in the case of the 2R 3rd big hit and the small hit, a predetermined chance eye such as "135" or a dedicated symbol for the 2R 3rd big hit and the small hit such as "3 ☆ 3" may be stopped and displayed. That is, the same effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of the 2R third big hit and at the time of the small hit. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the 2R third specific big hit or the small hit is obtained only by checking the stopped display of the effect symbol. It should be noted that the above-mentioned stop display mode of the effect symbol is an example, and when a big hit occurs, what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol can be appropriately changed.

[Setting processing such as notice production]
As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), first, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned "specific flag" is ON (S4922). Then, when it is determined that the specific flag is ON (YES in S4922), that is, when it is determined that the load of the sub control unit is high (the amount of control processing related to the game effect performed by the sub control unit is large). In, a notice determination table for a high load state shown in FIG. 53 is set as a notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and, if so, which advance notice effect is to be executed. S4923), shift to the processing of S4901. Since a plurality of advance notice determination tables are set as the advance notice determination table for the high load state, it is also referred to as a "notice determination table group". On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific flag is OFF (NO in S4922), the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is set as the advance notice determination table (S4924), and the process proceeds to S4901. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is used in the normal load state except for the state where the load of the sub control unit is particularly high, that is, the state in which the specific flag is ON. Use to determine the notice production.

More specifically, a notice to be used from the notice determination table shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 based on the state of the specific flag (ON or OFF) and the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. The decision table is to be set. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern 1)" and the specific flag is OFF, the notice determination table is used for the low load state shown in FIG. The conversation notice decision table for P1 and P9, the step-up notice decision table for P1 and P9, the cut-in notice decision table for P1 and P9, and the movable part notice decision table for P1 and P9 will be set.

Next, by the processing after S4901, the special symbol (effect symbol) fluctuates based on the effect determination random number (random number for advance notice effect determination, random number for effect symbol determination) acquired in S4501 and the advance notice determination table set in S4504. The notice effect to be executed during the display and the effect symbol (stop effect symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the effect symbol is changed and displayed are determined.

In S4901, any of a plurality of conversation notice effects is executed based on the value of the conversation notice determination random number acquired in S4501 and the conversation notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect (S4901), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this embodiment, there are four types of notice effects that constitute (belong to) the present notice effect type in the low load state, and one type of the advance notice effect that constitutes (belongs to) the present notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number for determining the conversation notice has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the four types of conversation notice effects is to be executed or whether the conversation notice effect is not to be executed, depending on the acquired value.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is P2 (variation pattern 2) and the specific flag is ON, the conversation notice determination for P2, P10, and P11 for the high load state shown in FIG. 53 is determined. The table is set. Then, if the value of the acquired random number for determining the conversation notice is any of "0 to 29, 60 to 99" (selection probability: 70%), the conversation notice effect is not executed. Further, when the acquired value is any of "30 to 59" (30%), the conversation notice effect of the "chance" of rank K3 is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b at a predetermined timing. As described above, in the state where the specific flag is ON (high load state), the execution mode of the conversation notice effect is only one mode of "chance". That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect, and when it is determined to be executed, the "chance" conversation notice effect (specific notice effect) is always executed. Therefore, in this notice production type (conversation notice production), it can be said that the feasible notice production is fixed.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is P2 (variation pattern 2) and the specific flag is ON, it is for P2, P10, and P11 for the low load state (normal use) shown in FIG. Conversation notice decision table is set. Then, if the value of the acquired random number for determining the conversation notice is any of "0 to 19" (selection probability: 20%), the conversation notice effect is not executed. Further, when the acquired value is any of "20 to 24" (5%), the conversation notice effect of "Hello" of rank K1 is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b at a predetermined timing. Further, if the acquired value is any of "25 to 29" (5%), the conversation notice effect of "Reach !?" of rank K2 is executed. This is a notice effect that notifies the player that there is a high possibility that reach will occur (for example, a reliability of about 50%). Further, if the acquired value is any of "30 to 59" (30%), the conversation notice effect of the "chance" of rank K3 is executed. This is a notice effect that notifies the player that there is a relatively high possibility of a big hit (for example, a reliability of about 20%). Further, if the acquired value is any of "60 to 99" (40%), the conversation notice effect of "super heat" of rank K4 is executed. This is a warning effect that notifies the player that there is a high possibility of a big hit (for example, a reliability of about 40%).

The ranks are set as K4> K3> K2> K1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. Therefore, in this conversation notice production, the production mode of "super heat" related to rank K4 is a notice production showing the highest possibility of a big hit (special game execution possibility). Further, since the fluctuation pattern P2 is a fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot, the feasibility of the conversation notice effect having a high jackpot reliability is set higher than the feasibility of the conversation notice effect having a low jackpot reliability. As described above, in the state where the specific flag is OFF (low load state), the execution mode of the conversation notice effect is the four modes shown in FIG. 52 (A). That is, even when it is determined that the conversation notice effect is to be executed, the notice effect in a different mode is executed depending on the acquired fluctuation pattern information and the value of the random number for determining the conversation notice.

If the S4902 determines whether or not to execute the conversation notice and determines that the conversation notice is to be executed (YES in S4902), the conversation notice flag ("first notice flag", "1st notice flag" indicating that the conversation notice is to be executed is executed. (Also referred to as "first notice information") is turned ON (S4903), the determined conversation notice effect is set (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the conversation notice is not executed (NO in S4902), the conversation notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it is left OFF) (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4906.

Next, in S4906, a plurality of step-up notices are given based on the value of the random number for step-up notice determination acquired in S4501 and the step-up notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined which of the effects is to be executed or whether the step-up notice effect is not to be executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type regardless of whether the load is low or high. Here, the random number range for the step-up notice determination is 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the five types of step-up notice effects is to be executed or whether the step-up notice effects are not to be executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "step-up notice effect" is an effect that changes in five stages from step 1 to step 5, and in the first embodiment, five characters (five types) perform steps 1 to step 5. One person is displayed in order, and all five people are gathered and displayed in step 5. Since this is a time-series production, it is said that the execution time becomes longer as the steps progress.

Since the specific method for determining the step-up notice effect is the same as the above-mentioned conversation notice effect, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as S5> S4> S3> S2> S1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4907 that the step-up notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4907), the step-up notice flag ("second notice flag" and "second notice information" indicating that the step-up notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4908), set the determined step-up notice effect (S4909), and shift to the processing of S4911. On the other hand, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect is not executed (NO in S4907), the step-up notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4910), and the process proceeds to S4911.

Next, in S4911, a plurality of cut-in notices are given based on the value of the random number for cut-in notice determination acquired in S4501 and the cut-in notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined which of the effects is to be executed or whether the cut-in notice effect is not to be executed (S4911), and the process proceeds to S4912. In this embodiment, there are three types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type in the low load state, and one type of advance notice effect that constitutes the present advance notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number range for the cut-in notice determination is 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the three types of cut-in notice effects is to be executed or whether the cut-in notice effect is not to be executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "cut-in notice effect" is a notice effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment may be a big hit, and is any of the characters A, B, or C at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbol. Is suddenly displayed (cut-in), and indicates the possibility of a big hit depending on the type and display timing of the displayed character. For example, it is assumed that the displayed character has a high possibility of becoming a big hit in the order of character C (high)> B (medium)> A (low) (special game execution possibility), and the character has a high possibility. The more it is displayed at the timing after the fluctuation display (the time closer to the stop display), the higher the possibility of becoming a big hit can be shown.

Since the specific method for determining the cut-in notice effect is the same as that for the conversation notice effect described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as C3> C2> C1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4912 that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4912), the cut-in notice flag ("third notice flag" and "third notice information" indicating that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4913), set the determined cut-in notice effect (S4914), and shift to the processing of S4916. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed (NO in S4912), the cut-in notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4915), and the process proceeds to S4916.

Next, in S4916, a plurality of movable part notices are announced based on the value of the random number for determining the movable part notice acquired in S4501 and the cut-in notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined which of the effects is to be executed, or whether to execute the moving part notice effect (S4916), and the process proceeds to S4917. In this embodiment, there are three types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type in the low load state, and two types of advance notice effects that form the main advance notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number for determining the movable part notice has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the three types of the movable part notice effect is executed or whether the movable part notice effect is not executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "movable portion notice effect" is an effect performed by using the movable decorative member 14 that performs a predetermined operation, and the light emitting member provided on the movable decorative member 14 or visible through the movable decorative member 14 is a predetermined embodiment. It has an effect of emitting light in, an effect of operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode, and an effect of combining light emission and operation.

Since the specific method for determining the moving part notice effect is the same as the conversation advance notice effect described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as M3> M2> M1 in descending order of the possibility of becoming a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4917 that the movable part notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4917), the movable part notice flag ("4th notice flag" and "4th notice information" indicating that the movable part notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4918), set the determined movable part notice effect (S4919), and shift to the processing of S4921. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable part notice effect is not executed (NO in S4917), the movable part notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4920), and the process proceeds to S4921.

In S4921, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the effect symbol determination table (not shown), and the determined effect symbol (stop effect symbol) is set (S4926). ), Finish the process.

As described above, the notice determination table used in the low load state (specific flag OFF state) shown in FIG. 52 and the notice determination table used in the high load state (specific flag ON state) shown in FIG. 53 are the notices to be determined. The number of production types (conversation notice production, step-up notice production, cut-in notice production, and moving part notice production) is the same, but the number of notice productions to be decided is different. Specifically, in the notice determination table for the high load state, the number of notice effects belonging to the conversation notice effect type is reduced from 4 to 1, and the number of advance notice effects belonging to the step-up notice effect type remains unchanged at 5, and the cut-in The number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type has been reduced from three to one, and the number of advance notice effects belonging to the movable part advance notice effect type has been reduced from three to two. That is, the number of advance notice effects to be decided has been reduced from 15 to 9. As a result, in the high load state (specific flag ON state), the number of processes of the advance notice effect determination process (also referred to as “game effect determination process”) for determining the advance notice effect is smaller than that in the low load state (specific flag OFF state). do. That is, the control load applied to the sub-control unit by the control process (notice effect determination unit) of the advance notice effect determination process is better when the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. , It is higher than the case where the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 53.

Therefore, during the execution of the ball entry start process in which the specific flag is turned ON, the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the advance notice effect determination process by the sub control unit is increasing (becomes a high load state). A low-load control process shall be performed as the advance notice effect determination process executed by the sub-control unit. Further, when the amount of control related to the game effect other than the advance notice effect determination process by the sub control unit is not so large (in a low load state), the load of the advance notice effect determination process is relatively high, but the game effect to be determined is determined. Control processing using a large number of advance notice determination tables shall be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load on the sub-control unit (CPU of the sub-control unit) from becoming excessive, and it is possible to execute a game production (notice production, etc.) with a wide variety of tastes and enhance the game interest. It becomes possible. Further, this makes it possible to optimize the control related to the game effect executed by the sub control unit.

Further, in the first embodiment, although the number of advance notice effects to be determined in the high load state is reduced, the number of advance notice determination tables, that is, the number of feasible advance notice effect types is not reduced. As a result, during the variable display of one effect symbol, the number of game effects (number of advance notice effect types) that can be executed during the variable display is the same regardless of whether the load is low or high. (In the first embodiment, 0 to 4 notice effects (notice effect types) can be executed in any state). Further, the maximum number of game effects (maximum number of advance notice effect types) that can be executed during the variable display of 1 effect symbol is the same regardless of whether the load is low or high. The number (in the first embodiment, a maximum of four notice effects can be executed in any state). As a result, in a high load state (a state in which the specific flag is ON), the number of advance notice effects to be determined is reduced, but by maintaining the number of feasible game effects, the game interest is reduced as much as possible. It becomes possible to prevent.

However, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the notice determination table for the high load state, the notice effect types (conversation notice effect, cut-in notice effect, movable part notice effect) in which the number of notice effects is decreasing , The feasibility of the advance notice effect of the notice effect type is low. Therefore, the case of determining the advance notice effect to be executed based on the notice determination table for the low load state is 1 more than the case of determining the advance notice effect to be executed based on the advance notice determination table for the high load state. There is a high possibility that a large number of advance notice effects will be executed during the variable display. However, by not reducing the number that can be executed (maximum number), it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible.

[Execution processing such as notice production]
Next, the execution process (S4406) such as the advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The present advance notice effect execution process (S4406) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is an unexecuted advance notice effect or the like while the variable effect is being executed (during the variable display of the effect symbol). First, S5101 determines whether or not the start time of the advance notice production has arrived (S5101). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has a conversation notice flag, a step-up notice flag, a cut-in notice flag, and a movable part notice flag as notice flags, and among the notice effects shown by these, the pachinko game machine 1 has not been executed. It is determined whether or not there is a notice effect for which the execution time (start time) has arrived, which is a notice effect (the execution time has not arrived). Further, the execution timing of each of these advance notice effects to be executed is set in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), and the execution time is controlled by a predetermined timer means possessed by the sub control unit. Then, when the count value of the timer means indicates the start time of the predetermined advance notice effect, it is determined that the start time of the advance notice effect has arrived. In addition to the advance notice effect, it may be determined whether or not the start time of another game effect (lamp effect, background effect, game mode effect, etc.) has arrived, and the start and end of the game effect may be controlled.

When it is determined by S5101 that there is a notice effect whose start time has arrived (YES in S5101), a notice effect start command (conversation notice start command, step-up notice start) for executing the rehearsal effect whose start time has arrived. Command, cut-in notice start command, moving part notice start command, etc.) are set (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no notice production etc. for which the start time has arrived in S5101 (NO in S5101), the process shifts to the processing of S5103. The advance notice effect start command set in the process of S5102 is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) by the command transmission process (S4006). Then, the CPU of the image control board 100 that has received the advance notice effect start command reads out the effect image corresponding to the advance notice effect related to the advance notice effect start command from the ROM of the image control board 100, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. It is displayed on 7a, and a production pattern game production is performed.

In S5103, it is determined whether or not there is a notice effect being executed (S5103), and if it is determined that there is no notice effect being executed (NO in S5103), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an advance notice effect or the like being executed in S5103 (YES in S5103), it is then determined whether or not the end time of the execution period of the advance notice effect or the like being executed has arrived (S5104). Since the execution period is determined for each advance notice effect, the execution period is controlled by a predetermined timer means possessed by the sub-control unit, so that the count value of the timer means determines the end time of the predetermined advance notice effect being executed. When indicated, it is determined that the end time of the advance notice production has arrived.

When it is determined by S5104 that the end time of the ongoing notice effect, etc. has arrived (YES in S5104), the notice effect end command (conversation notice end command, step up) for ending the notice effect whose end time has arrived. Set the notice end command, cut-in notice end command, movable part notice end command, etc. (S5105), and finish the process. In addition, even if it is determined in S5104 that the end time has not arrived for the advance notice production, etc. being executed (NO in S5104), the process is completed. The notice effect end command set in the process of S5105 is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) by the command transmission process (S4006). Then, the CPU of the image control board 100 that has received the advance notice effect end command finishes displaying the advance notice effect related to the advance notice effect end command, and performs the effect symbol game effect. Here, in the first embodiment, the advance notice effect or the like being executed is terminated by the advance notice effect or the like end command, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Regarding the end control of the advance notice effect, etc., for some or all of these advance notice effects, etc., the advance notice effect is started based on the advance notice effect, etc. start command, regardless of the advance notice effect, etc. end command (without providing the advance notice effect, etc. end command). Then, the advance notice production may be terminated when a predetermined production time elapses.

[Fluctuating production end processing]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation effect end process (S4408), first, in S4601, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the variation stop command (S4601) and refers to the mode status (S4602). Next, the S4603 determines whether or not the mode status is "1", that is, whether or not the effect mode is the effect mode A (S4603). Then, if the mode status is "1", the process proceeds to S4607. On the other hand, if the mode status is not "1", the value "M" of the effect mode counter corresponding to the current effect mode is subtracted by 1 (S4604), and whether or not the value "M" after the subtraction is "0" is determined. Judge (S4605). If it is determined in S4605 that the value "M" after subtraction is not "0" (NO in S4605), the process proceeds to S4607. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value "M" after subtraction is "0" (YES in S4605), "1" is set in the mode status to set the effect mode to the effect mode A (S4606), and S4607 Move to processing. In the S4607, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect end command for ending the effect symbol game effect (S4607), and ends the process.

[Special game production selection process]
As shown in FIG. 50, in the special game effect selection process (S4410), first, the opening command is analyzed by S4701 (S4701). Next, the S4702 performs a special game effect pattern selection process for selecting a pattern (effect mode) of the special game effect to be executed during the special game (big hit game or small hit game) based on the analyzed opening command (S4702). This special game effect is executed during the opening period before the opening of the special game opening and during the opening of the large winning opening and during the interval between the opening and opening (between rounds). Includes post-start production and. Next, in the S4703, an opening effect start command for starting the special game effect based on the special game effect pattern selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is set (S4703), and the process is completed.

When the opening effect start command set in S4703 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM of the image control board 100. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As an opening effect, for example, an effect indicating that a right-handed game is performed is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, as a special game effect selected when executing a special game as a 2R third big hit or a small hit, in the opening effect, a game ball is aimed at the second big prize device 36 (the second big prize opening 35). It is preferable that the one that displays the fact that the player fires (the player plays the right-handed game) on the display screen 7a is selected. That is, at a predetermined timing (opening period) before the opening of the second prize-winning device 36 (second prize-winning opening 35), an effect of notifying that the right-handed game should be started is performed in advance. NS. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the second large winning opening 35 during the short opening time of the second large winning opening 35, which is a total of 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, when the special game as the first big hit of 15R is executed, the opening effect without such a notification (notification that the right-handed hit is continued before the opening of the second big winning opening 35) is selected. It has become like. Even when the special game related to the 2R third big hit or small hit is executed, the opening effect that does not include such a launch notification may be selected.

[Ending effect selection process]
As shown in FIG. 51, in the ending effect selection process (S4412), first, the ending command is analyzed in S4801 (S4801). Then, in S4802, the mode status change process is performed (S4802). In the mode status change process (S4802), if the special game currently being executed is a big hit game related to the 15R second big hit, the mode status is set to "2". Further, if the jackpot game is related to the 15R first jackpot and there is no V passage during the V valid period, the mode status is set to "2". Further, if the jackpot game is related to the 15R first jackpot and there is a V passage during the V valid period, the mode status is set to "3". If it is a hit game (big hit game) related to the 2R third big hit or small hit, the mode status is set to "4" or "5". The initial value of the mode status is "1".

Due to such a change (setting) of the mode status, the effect mode in the effect symbol game effect executed along with the variable display of the special symbol after the end of the special game (big hit game, hit game) is changed (after setting). It is said to be a production mode corresponding to the mode status of. That is, in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct, if the 15R first big hit and there is a V passage during the V valid period of the special game, the first (first) special symbol change after the end of the special game. Along with the display, the effect mode C is executed. As a result, the player is notified that the current gaming state is a high probability state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a 2R third big hit or a small hit, the effect mode D or E is accompanied by the variation display of the first (first) special symbol after the end of the special game. Will be executed. As a result, the player is notified that the current gaming state may be a high-probability state or a low-probability state, that is, a high-probability state may be possible. Further, this effect mode D or E is in a high probability state after the special game related to the 2R third big hit, but may be in a low probability state after the special game related to the small hit. A person cannot be definitively determined to be in a high probability state. Therefore, this effect mode can also be referred to as a probability non-notification mode.

Furthermore, in the mode status change process (S4802), since an upper limit is set for the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the changed effect mode, the upper limit number of times is set to the value "M" of the effect mode counter corresponding to the changed effect mode. To set. Specifically, when setting the effect mode B, the value "Mb" of the effect mode counter is set to 100 (when V is not passed during the 15R second jackpot and V valid period) or 140 (15R first jackpot and V is valid). When there is no V passage during the period) is set. When setting the effect mode C, 140 is set in the value "Mc" of the effect mode counter. Further, when setting the effect mode D or E, 30 is set in the value "Md" or "Me" of the effect mode counter.

Next, in S4803, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status (S4803), and then in S4804, the effect pattern (effect mode) of the ending effect is selected based on the analyzed ending command and the referenced mode status. Performs the ending effect pattern selection process (S4804). The ending effect is an effect to be executed during the ending period after all the large winning opening opening processes in the special game are completed. Then, in S4805, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect based on the selected ending effect pattern (S4805), and ends the process.

Further, when the ending effect start command set in S4805 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined ending effect image to the ROM of the image control board 100. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, in this embodiment, when the special game related to the 15R first jackpot is executed and V is passed during the V valid period, the characters "effect mode C rush" are displayed on the display screen 7a as the ending effect. Is selected. Further, as the ending effect for the special game related to the 2R third big hit or small hit, one that displays the characters "effect mode D rush" or "effect mode E rush" on the display screen 7a is selected.

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with a specific flag for determining whether or not the amount of control processing related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process of the sub-control unit is large, and is related to the game effect. When the control processing amount is determined to be larger than the predetermined amount (during the execution of the effect start processing at the time of entering the ball), the specific flag is turned ON, and when the specific flag is ON, the game effect is determined. It is possible to prevent the load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive by performing control processing with a small amount of processing (low control load) as processing. In addition, when the specific flag is OFF, as a game effect determination process, a control process with a larger amount of processing (higher control load) than when the specific flag is ON is performed to execute various game effects with high taste. Is possible.

As a result, the control load (control state) of the sub-control unit balances the control load between the processing amount of the game effect determination process and the control processing amount related to the game effect excluding it, and the game effect control unit is excessive. It is possible to execute various game effects without imposing a heavy load. also,
It is possible to control the optimum game production. In addition, by providing a characteristic configuration that is not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to achieve unique effects that conventional pachinko gaming machines do not have, or significant effects compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines. Become.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in which the notice effect setting process of the first embodiment and the notice determination table for the high load state (specific flag is ON state) are different, will be described. In the second embodiment, when the load is low (the specific flag is OFF), the notice effect to be executed is determined based on the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52, which is the same as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the high load state (specific flag is ON state), unlike the first embodiment, the notice effect to be executed is determined based on the notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 56, the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the second embodiment is limited to the cut-in advance notice determination table, and the (executable) advance notice effect type to be determined is only the cut-in advance notice. Will be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52, the notice decision table for the low load state is a conversation notice decision table, a step-up notice decision table, a cut-in notice decision table, and a movable part notice decision table, which are subject to decision. There are four types of (executable) notice effects: conversation notice, step-up notice, cut-in notice, and moving part notice. That is, in the high load state in the second embodiment, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the sub control unit (notice effect determination unit) is smaller than that in the low load state (4 types → 1 type). Further, in a high load state, it can be said that the feasible advance notice effect type is fixed to one type. As a result, it is possible to significantly reduce the amount of processing in the advance notice effect determination process, and it is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessive when the control load of the sub control unit is high.

Further, in the high load state in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed, the number of the notice effect types that can be executed is reduced as compared with the low load state, and a specific notice effect type (cut-in notice effect) is used. ) Is executed, but the number of (executable) game effects included in the specific advance notice effect type remains three, which is the same as the advance notice decision table for the low load state, so that the game effects are diverse. It also has a certain effect in terms of conversion, and it is possible to secure a game interest.

Next, the advance notice effect setting process (S4506) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. First, in S4951, it is determined whether or not the specific flag is ON (S4951), and when it is determined that the specific flag is ON, that is, it is in a high load state (YES in S4951), the conversation notice determination and step-up are performed. The advance notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56 is set (S4974), and the process proceeds to S4967, without executing the advance notice determination, the movable part advance notice determination, or the like. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the specific flag is ON, no matter what kind of information the fluctuation pattern information is (even the information related to the big hit), the conversation notice effect, the step-up notice effect, and the movable None of the club notice productions will be performed. Further, when the specific flag is ON, the process shifts to the S4967 process without performing the processes of S4952 to S4965, so that the processing amount of the advance notice effect setting process (game effect determination process) can be significantly reduced. It is possible to prevent the control load of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4951 that the specific flag is not ON (NO in S4951), the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is set (S4973). Next, the process related to the conversation notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect is executed (S4952 to S4956). Similar to the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, this process determines whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect based on the notice determination table or the like shown in FIG. 52, and if so, which case. It determines whether to execute the advance notice effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in S4957, the process related to the step-up notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect is executed (S4957 to S4961). Since this process is also the same control process as the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Next, in S4962, the process related to the movable portion advance notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the movable portion advance notice effect is executed (S4962 to 4966). Since this process is also the same control process as the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the low load state (specification) is obtained for three types of advance notice effect types (conversation advance notice effect type, step-up advance notice effect type, and moving part advance notice effect type) out of the four types of advance notice effect types. Only when the flag is OFF), it is subject to determination (of the advance notice effect determination unit) in the advance notice effect setting process. A plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, including these four types of advance notice effect types, are stored in the advance notice effect storage unit (sub-control unit). As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation of the game effect in the low load state, and to execute the game effect with high taste without increasing the control load on the sub control unit.

Next, in S4967, the cut-in notice determination is executed. When the specific flag is ON, whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56 set in S4974, and which cut-in notice effect is executed. Is determined (S4967). When the specific flag is OFF, whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice determination table shown in FIG. 52 (C) set in S4973, and which cut-in notice effect is executed. Is determined (S4967). Next, in S4968, it is determined whether or not to execute the cut-in notice (S4968), and if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice (YES in S4968), a cut-in notice flag indicating that the cut-in notice is executed is set. Turn it on (S4969), set the decided cut-in notice effect (S4970), and shift to the processing of S4972. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed (NO in S4968), the cut-in notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4971), and the process proceeds to S4972. Since S4972 is the same control process as the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the sub-control unit considers that the processing amount of the control related to the game effect excluding the advance notice effect determination process is larger than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is ON, The number of advance notice effect types that can be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state is reduced and fixed to a specific advance notice effect type (cut-in advance notice effect in Example 2). As a result, it is possible to remarkably reduce the amount of processing related to the advance notice effect determination process and prevent the control load of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 3 will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment when it is considered that the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit is more than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is turned on. In the first embodiment, the specific flag is turned ON while the execution of the ball entry start processing (S4402) performed when the sub control unit receives the start ball entry command from the main control unit is set as a high load state. In the third embodiment, the low load state is set during the execution of the special game (big hit game), and the high load state is set when the special game is not executed. It should be noted that even when the special game is not being executed, the effect symbol (special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, and the control process related to the effect symbol (special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (such a period is referred to as "variable display". (Also referred to as "in processing") may be in a high load state.

During the execution of the big hit game, the production for the big hit game such as the round effect is executed, but since the effect symbol (special symbol) is not displayed in a variable manner, the control load such as the variable effect start process and the variable effect end process is high. Does not perform the predetermined control process. Therefore, in the third embodiment, it can be said that the load of the control processing of the sub control unit is lower during the big hit game than during the “variation display processing”. Therefore, during the fluctuation display processing, the specific flag is turned on to indicate that the load is high, and during the execution of the jackpot game, the specific flag is turned off to indicate that the load is low. Then, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect to be executed based on different notice determination tables depending on whether the specific flag is in the ON state or the specific flag is in the OFF state. This point is the same as in Example 1 and Example 2.

In the third embodiment, when a predetermined timing during the special game, for example, when a start ball entry command is received, when a predetermined round (for example, 5R, 10R, etc.) is started, or when a predetermined round is finished. , It is assumed that the advance notice effect determination process (game effect determination process) is performed. It is also possible to execute the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination process during the special game during the special game or during the variable display of the effect symbol. Here, it is assumed that the advance notice production includes the above-mentioned advance production. Then, for example, when the advance notice effect is determined during the special game, the advance notice effect to be executed is determined using the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 52, and when the advance notice effect is determined during the variable display process, FIG. 53 The advance notice effect to be executed may be determined using the advance notice determination table shown in.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the advance notice effect is determined using a notice determination table different from that during the variable display process during the big hit game, it is possible to execute a rehearsal effect that is not a determination target during the variable display process. Therefore, since it has a dedicated advance notice effect that can be executed only during the big hit game, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the game effect during the big hit game and enhance the game interest.

Next, the process of turning the specific flag ON or OFF in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the third embodiment, the specific flag is turned on by the process when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on, the state is determined to be a high load state. Then, in the special game effect selection process (S4410) executed with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 57, a process of turning off the specific flag is performed. As a result, it becomes a state determined to be a low load state.

[Special game production selection process]
As shown in FIG. 57, in the special game effect selection process (S4410), first, the opening command is analyzed (S4701), then the special game effect pattern selection process (S4702) is performed, and then the opening command effect start command set process is performed. (S4703) and move to the processing of S4704. Since the processes of S4701 to S4703 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, in S4704, the specific flag is turned off (S4704), and the process is completed. By the process of turning off this specific flag, it is determined that the execution of the special game is in the low load state (first control state). Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the special game, it becomes possible to determine the advance notice effect that is not executed during the variable display process as the advance notice effect (game effect). In addition, the advance notice effect determined during this special game may be executed during the special game. That is, if the control process can determine the high-load game effect in the low-load state, it is desirable to execute the high-load game effect during the low-load state. This makes it possible to execute control related to the optimum game effect.

[Ending effect selection process]
Next, a process of turning on the specific flag with the end of the special game will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the ending effect selection process (S4412), first, the specific flag is turned ON (S4806), and the process proceeds to the process of S4801. By the process of turning on this specific flag, it is determined that the high load state (second control state) is after the end of the special game. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed after the end of this special game, the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the high load state as the advance notice effect (game effect). Further, the advance notice effect determined when the special game is not executed (high load state in which the specific flag is ON) may be executed during the state (state in which the specific flag is ON). When the advance notice effect determined in the high load state is executed in the low load state (during the special game), various advance notice effects (dedicated advance notice effects) can be determined (executable) for a limited period of the low load state. It cannot be used effectively. Therefore, it is preferable to execute the advance notice effect determined in the high load state during the high load state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the execution of the special game is set as the low load state, and the special advance notice effect that is not the decision target during the variable display of the identification information is set as the decision target. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. As another aspect of the setting control of the specific flag, a state in which the specific flag is ON is determined as a low load state, and a state in which the specific flag is OFF is determined as a high load state. The mode may be such that the flag is turned ON.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine includes a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the game effect to be executed and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, and is in a low load state ( As a game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state), a game effect not to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state (second control state) may be provided. ..

Further, the game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the low load state may be different from the game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state. Further, the advance notice effect execution unit may execute the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the low load state in the low load state. Further, the advance notice effect execution unit may execute the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state in the high load state. Further, the low load state (first control state) is a predetermined time when the special game is being executed, and the high load state (second control state) is a predetermined time when the special game is not being executed. May be good.

In addition, it is equipped with a start port through which a game ball can enter, and as a control (effect control process) related to the game effect, it has a control related to the game effect at the time of ball entry, which is executed based on the ball entering the start port, and is in a low load state. Is a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the time of entry (the effect control process at the time of entry, the notice effect control process at the time of entry) is being executed, and the high load state controls the game effect at the time of entry. It may be a predetermined time when it is not executed. Further, as the control related to the game effect, it has the control related to the game effect at the start of the change (the effect control process at the start of the change, the notice effect control process at the start of the change) that is executed based on the start of the variation display of the identification information, and is in a low load state. Is a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the start of fluctuation is being executed, and the high load state may be a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the start of fluctuation is not being executed.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 4 will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when it is considered that the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit is more than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is turned on, the control is different from the first and third embodiments. In the fourth embodiment, the high load state is set during the execution of the variation effect start process, and the low load state is set at other times. The variation effect start process is a process executed when the sub control unit receives a variation start command from the main control unit, and among them, a random number acquisition process for determining the effect, a variation effect pattern selection process, a setting process such as a notice effect, etc. , It is necessary to perform a lot of processing, and it is a control processing with a relatively large amount of processing.

In the fourth embodiment, the specific flag is turned ON during the execution of the variation effect start process having a large amount of processing, and the specific flag is turned OFF when the variation effect start process is not executed. Further, since the advance notice effect determination process is performed along with the change effect start process, the advance notice effect determination process executed during the change effect start process uses the advance notice determination table for the high load state (for the second control state). The advance notice effect is determined by using the advance notice effect determination process, which is executed when the variable effect start process is not in progress (for example, during a big hit game), using the advance notice determination table for the low load state (for the first control state). It is possible to determine the advance notice production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive, and to perform various game effects by controlling the optimum game effects.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, a process of turning the specific flag ON or OFF in accordance with the variation effect start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the variation effect start processing (S4402), first, the specific flag is turned ON (S4508), and the process shifts to the processing of S4501. By the process of turning on this specific flag, it is determined that the high load state (second control state) is being executed during the execution of the variation effect start process. Then, in the fourth embodiment, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the variable effect start process, the advance notice effect determined by using the advance notice determination table for the high load state is executed as the advance notice effect (game effect). Will be done.

Next, processing is performed in order from S4501 to S4507. Since these processes are the same as the variable effect start process of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, following S4507, in S4509, the specific flag is turned off (S4509), and the process is completed. By the process of turning off this specific flag, it is determined that the load state is low (first control state) after the variation effect start process is completed (when the variation effect start process is not performed). Then, in the fourth embodiment, if the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the change effect start process is not executed, the advance notice determined by using the advance notice determination table for the low load state as the advance notice effect (game effect). The production will be executed.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the high load state is set during the execution of the variable effect start process, the low load state is set when the variable effect start process is not executed, and the execution is performed using different notice determination tables. The notice production is decided. In addition, in the low load state, a dedicated advance notice effect that is not a decision target in the high load state is set as the decision target. This prevents the processing load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive, and by executing the control related to the optimum game effect, it is possible to execute various game effects.

Further, as for the advance notice effect and the game effect of the examples described later, similarly to the above-mentioned advance notice effect and the game effect, the effect can be executed only in either the low load state or the high load state, or the low load state. And it can be an effect that can be executed in any state of the high addition state.

(Special notice production)
Next, the special advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the fifth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68. First, an example of executing the special advance notice effect A222 (first specific advance notice effect) at a predetermined timing (first timing) along with the variable display of the effect symbol will be described. In FIG. 62 (a), the variation display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed, and the variation display of three (all) effect symbols of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is started. It shows a scene immediately after. Therefore, the three (all) production symbols of the left production design, the middle production design, and the right production design are changing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), there are three first effect hold 9a (pictures of “○”) in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. It is displayed. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

Further, above the display screen 7a (image display device 7), an effect notification unit 221 that is controlled to be lit and displayed in a predetermined display mode is provided. In FIG. 62A, the effect notification unit 221 is in a non-lighting state 221a (non-lighting mode) in which light is not emitted (additional effect is not performed). The frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 51 of the gaming machine may be the effect notification unit 221, or the decorative member provided on the game board 2 may be the effect notification unit 221. That is, the effect notification unit 221 may be a gaming member provided in the gaming machine frame, or may be a gaming member provided in the gaming board.

As a special advance notice effect to be described later, it has a plurality of effects having different production modes (display modes). Further, the special advance notice effect is a special advance notice effect executed from the start to the end of the variable display of the effect symbol, that is, the larger the number of special advance notice effects executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the more the jackpot game. It is said to be a notice production showing a high possibility of feasibility (big hit reliability). Specifically, as special notice production, it has special notice production A222 (first specific notice production), special notice production B226 (second specific notice production), special notice production C227 (third specific notice production), and the like. Regardless of which of these special notice effects A to C is executed or in which combination they are executed, the jackpot reliability is determined by the number of special notice effects to be executed.

For example, any of the special notice effect A222 (first specific notice effect), the special notice effect B226 (second specific notice effect), and the special notice effect C227 (third specific notice effect) are accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol. When one type of special notice effect is executed (A, B or C), the special notice effect shall show a jackpot reliability of 10% regardless of the type. In addition, any of the special notice effect A222 (first specific notice effect), the special notice effect B226 (second specific notice effect), and the special notice effect C227 (third specific notice effect) are accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol. If two types of special notice effects are executed (A and B, A and C, or B and C), the special notice effects will have a jackpot reliability of 30% regardless of the type of combination. It shall be shown.

In addition, three types of special notice effect A222 (first specific notice effect), special notice effect B226 (second specific notice effect), and special notice effect C227 (third specific notice effect) are accompanied by the variable display of the effect pattern (3 types of special notice effect). When the special notice effect of (all) is executed (A, B and C), the special notice effect shall show a jackpot reliability of 80%. In this embodiment, an example having three types of special notice effects is shown, but four or more special notice effects may be provided. Also in this case, the jackpot reliability shall be indicated by the number of special advance notice effects executed in association with the variable display of the effect symbols. As a result, the player can easily recognize the jackpot reliability of the special notice production, and can enhance the game interest.

In addition, a notice effect other than the special notice effect may be executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol. In such a case, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize which effect is the special notice effect, the above-mentioned effect notification is performed together with the special notice effect (when the special notice effect is executed, along with the execution of the special notice effect). The unit 221 is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed). As a result, by confirming the lighting state 221b (additional effect) of the effect notification unit 221 executed together with the effect, the player can easily recognize whether or not the special notice effect is executed (number). ..

In addition, the "effect (additional effect) in which the effect notification unit 221 is set to the lighting state 221b" is executed in association with the special advance notice effect, and when a plurality of special advance notice effects are executed, it corresponds to each special advance notice effect. Is executed at least once. Therefore, when two types of special advance notice effects are executed along with the variable display of the effect symbols, the effect of setting the effect notification unit 221 to the lighting state 221b two or more times in response to each special advance notice effect. (Additional production) ”is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to indicate in advance the execution of the special advance notice effect, the effect (additional effect) is performed after performing the "effect (additional effect) in which the effect notification unit 221 is in the lighting state 221b". A special notice effect will be given while it is being executed (while maintaining the lighting state). As a result, by recognizing the lighting of the production notification unit, the improvement in the reliability of the jackpot is recognized, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, this makes it possible to raise the player's attention to the production notification unit and raise the expectation for a big hit. In addition, it is possible to clearly and easily recognize which of the many game effects to be executed is the special advance notice effect.

FIG. 62 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (a). This scene is also a scene immediately after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the three (all) effect symbols of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol change (without stopping and displaying any of them). The display is continuing. The effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), and the player is notified that any special notice effect will be executed from now on.

FIG. 62 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (b). This scene is also a scene immediately after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the three (all) effect symbols of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol change (without stopping and displaying any of them). The display is continuing. In the first notice effect display area 222a partitioned by the diagonal line on the left side of the display screen 7a, a scene in which the special notice effect A (first specific notice effect) 222, which is one of the special notice effects, is executed is shown. .. The special notice effect A222 is an effect executed in the first notice effect display area 222a of the display screen, and is a notice effect of the first display mode in which a specific character is displayed and the character "A" is displayed. ..

In addition, in the special notice effect A222, three (all) effect symbols, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol, are displayed immediately after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (without stopping and displaying any of them). It is said to be an effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display is continued. Other special notice effects, which will be described later, also have special execution timings set for each, and when a plurality of special notice effects are executed, these special notice effects are executed at different timings.

Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect A222) is a special advance notice effect. There is. In this way, the player may recognize that the effect executed together with the "effect (additional effect) in which the effect notification unit 221 is in the lighting state 221b" is a special notice effect, and is accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol. The number of executions of the special advance notice effect to be executed can be easily counted.

FIG. 62 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (c). This scene is also a scene immediately after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the three (all) effect symbols of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol change (without stopping and displaying any of them). The display is continuing. On the display screen, the special notice effect A222 is terminated, and the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled from the lit state 221b to the non-lighting state 221a (off state), and the special notice effect (special notice effect A222) is controlled. ) Indicates that it has ended. As described above, by temporarily setting the effect notification unit 221 to the non-lighting state 221a with the end of the special advance notice effect, it is possible to clearly grasp the execution of the next special advance notice effect.

FIG. 62 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (d). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) is stopped and displayed at the "3" symbol, and the other symbols (the other two, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. It shows the scene where you are doing. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is in the non-lighting state 221a (additional effect is not executed).

FIG. 62 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (e). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) is followed by the right effect symbol 8R, which is stopped and displayed at the same "3" symbol as the left effect symbol, and others (the other one, the middle effect symbol 8C). The design of is showing the scene where the variable display is continued. That is, it shows a scene in which the effect symbol is the reach mode 224 (“3 ↓ 3”) in which the “3” symbol is the reach symbol 224a. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is in the non-lighting state 221a (additional effect is not executed).

FIG. 63 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (f). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) and the right effect symbol 8R are followed by the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol), which stops at a "4" symbol different from the reach symbol ("3"). It is displayed and shows a scene in which the out-of-design symbol (“343”, out-of-symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is in the non-lighting state 221a (additional effect is not executed). In this execution mode, as a result of executing the special advance notice effect A222 (first specific advance notice effect), an example in which the missed symbol is stopped and displayed (the result of the special symbol pass / fail determination is missed) has been described. However, as a result of executing only one type of special advance notice effect A222 (first specific advance notice effect) along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the winning symbol (“333”, winning symbol combination) is stopped and displayed (special symbol winning / failing). The result of the judgment may be a big hit). The same applies to the execution mode described later.

Next, an example of executing the special advance notice effect B226 (second specific advance notice effect) at a predetermined timing (second timing) in accordance with the variable display of the effect symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (a). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) is stopped and displayed at the “4” symbol, and the other symbols indicate a scene in which the variable display is continued. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), and the player is notified that any special advance notice effect will be executed from now on.

FIG. 63 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 63 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (h). This scene is also a scene in which only the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the first stopped symbol is stopped and displayed). In the second advance notice effect display area 226a partitioned by the diagonal line on the right side of the display screen 7a, a scene in which the special advance notice effect B226 (second specific advance notice effect), which is one type of the special advance notice effect, is executed is shown. The special notice effect B226 is an effect executed in the second notice effect display area 226a of the display screen, and the specific character is displayed and the character "B" is displayed (a display mode different from the first display mode). ) It is a notice effect of the second display mode. In the special notice effect B, the specific character is displayed as in the special notice effect A (rightward), but the display mode (leftward) of the specific character is different.

Further, the special notice effect B226 is an effect executed at the timing when the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the first stop symbol is stopped and displayed) after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect B226) is the special advance notice effect. There is.

FIG. 63 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 63 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (i). This scene is also a scene in which the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the first stop symbol is stopped and displayed) after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. On the display screen, the special notice effect B226 is terminated, and the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled from the lit state 221b to the non-lighting state 221a (off state), and the special notice effect (special notice effect B226) is controlled. ) Indicates that it has ended. As described above, by temporarily setting the effect notification unit 221 to the non-lighting state 221a with the end of the special advance notice effect, it is possible to clearly grasp the execution of the next special advance notice effect.

FIG. 63 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 63 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (j). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) is followed by the right effect symbol 8R, which is stopped and displayed at the same "4" symbol as the left effect symbol, and others (the other one, the middle effect symbol 8C). The design of is showing the scene where the variable display is continued. That is, it shows a scene in which the effect symbol is the reach mode 224 (“4 ↓ 4”) in which the “4” symbol is the reach symbol 224a. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is in the non-lighting state 221a (additional effect is not executed).

FIG. 63 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 63 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (k). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) and the right effect symbol 8R are followed by the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol), which stops at a "5" symbol different from the reach symbol ("4"). It is displayed and shows a scene in which the out-of-design symbol (“454”, out-of-symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is in the non-lighting state 221a (additional effect is not executed).

Next, an example of executing the special advance notice effect B226 (second specific advance notice effect) at a predetermined timing (third timing) according to the variable display of the effect symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 64. The first to third timings are different timings during the variable display of the effect symbol. FIG. 64 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (a). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) is stopped and displayed at the “5” symbol, and the other symbols indicate a scene in which the variable display is continued. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is in the non-lighting state 221a (additional effect is not executed).

FIG. 64 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (m). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) is followed by the right effect symbol 8R, which is stopped and displayed at the same "5" symbol as the left effect symbol, and others (the other one, the middle effect symbol 8C). The design of is showing the scene where the variable display is continued. That is, it shows a scene in which the effect symbol is the reach mode 224 (“5 ↓ 5”) in which the “5” symbol is the reach symbol 224a. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), and the player is notified that any special advance notice effect will be executed from now on.

FIG. 64 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (n) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (n). This scene is also a scene in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are in the reach mode. In the third advance notice effect display area 227a partitioned by the diagonal line in the center of the display screen 7a, a scene in which the special advance notice effect C227 (third specific advance notice effect), which is one of the special advance notice effects, is executed is shown. The special notice effect C227 is an effect executed in the third notice effect display area 227a of the display screen, and the specific character is displayed and the character "C" is displayed (first display mode and second display mode). It is a notice effect of the third display mode (of a display mode different from the above). In the special advance notice effect B, the specific character is displayed as in the special advance notice effects A and B, but the display mode (having a tool) of the specific character is different.

Further, the special advance notice effect C227 is an effect executed at the timing when the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed (the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed) after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol. Will be done. It should be noted that the effect may be executed when the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed and the reach mode is reached. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect B226) is the special advance notice effect. There is.

FIG. 64 (p) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (o) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (o). This scene is also a scene in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed in the reach mode after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol. On the display screen, the special notice effect C227 is terminated, and the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled from the lit state 221b to the non-lighting state 221a (off state), and the special notice effect (special notice effect B226) is controlled. ) Indicates that it has ended. As described above, by temporarily setting the effect notification unit 221 to the non-lighting state 221a with the end of the special advance notice effect, it is possible to clearly grasp the execution of the next special advance notice effect.

FIG. 64 (q) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (p) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (p). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) and the right effect symbol 8R are followed by the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol), which stops at a "6" symbol different from the reach symbol ("5"). It is displayed and shows a scene in which the out-of-design symbol (“565”, out-of-symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is in the non-lighting state 221a (additional effect is not executed).

Next, an example in which a plurality of special advance notice effects are executed during the variable display of one effect symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. In FIG. 65 (a), the variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed, and the variable display of the three (all) production symbols of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is started. It shows a scene immediately after.

FIG. 65 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (a). This scene is also a scene immediately after the start of the variable display of the production symbols, and all three (all) production symbols (the left production design, the middle production design, and the right production design) are all (without stopping and displaying). The variable display is continuing. The effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), and the player is notified that any special notice effect will be executed from now on.

FIG. 65 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (b). This scene is also a scene immediately after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the three (all) effect symbols of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol change (without stopping and displaying any of them). The display is continuing. In the first notice effect display area 222a partitioned by the diagonal line on the left side of the display screen 7a, a scene in which the special notice effect A (first specific notice effect) 222, which is one of the special notice effects, is executed is shown. .. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect A222) is a special advance notice effect. There is.

FIG. 65 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (c). This scene is also a scene immediately after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the three (all) effect symbols of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol change (without stopping and displaying any of them). The display is continuing. On the display screen, the special notice effect A222 is terminated, and the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled from the lit state 221b to the non-lighting state 221a (off state), and the special notice effect (special notice effect A222) is controlled. ) Indicates that it has ended.

FIG. 65 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (d). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) is stopped and displayed at the “4” symbol, and the other symbols indicate a scene in which the variable display is continued. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), and the player is notified that any special advance notice effect will be executed from now on. That is, the second effect notification unit 221 shows a scene in which the control (additional effect) is executed in the lighting state 221b, and after that, the player is notified that the second special notice effect is executed. NS.

FIG. 65 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (e). This scene is also a scene in which only the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the first stopped symbol is stopped and displayed). Following the above-mentioned special advance notice effect A222, a scene in which the special advance notice effect B226 (second specific advance notice effect) is executed in the second advance notice effect display area 226a partitioned by the diagonal line on the right side of the display screen 7a is shown. There is.

Further, unlike the execution timing of the special notice effect A222, the special notice effect B226 is executed at the timing when the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the first stop symbol is stopped and displayed) after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol. It is said that. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect B226) is the special advance notice effect. There is.

FIG. 66 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (f). This scene is also a scene in which the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the first stop symbol is stopped and displayed) after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. On the display screen, the special advance notice effect B226 is terminated, and the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled from the lit state 221b to the non-lighting state 221a (off state), and the second special advance notice effect (special). It indicates that the advance notice production B226) has been completed. As described above, by temporarily setting the effect notification unit 221 to the non-lighting state 221a with the end of the special advance notice effect, it is possible to clearly grasp the execution of the next special advance notice effect.

As described above, the second special notice effect having a different display mode and display area is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol 1, so that the jackpot reliability that the special notice effect notifies the player is It rises from 10% to 30%. As a result, the player raises the expectation for the big hit, expects the lighting control (additional production) of the production notification unit to occur again, and enhances the interest of the game. Further, in the execution mode of the present embodiment, when the special advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times, each special advance notice effect is executed (started) after a predetermined period has elapsed after the previous special advance notice effect is completed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to predict when the special notice effect will occur, which enhances the interest of the game.

FIG. 66 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (g). On the display screen, the left effect symbol 8L (first symbol) is followed by the right effect symbol 8R, which is stopped and displayed at the same "4" symbol as the left effect symbol, and others (the other one, the middle effect symbol 8C). The design of is showing the scene where the variable display is continued. That is, it shows a scene in which the effect symbol is the reach mode 224 (“4 ↓ 4”) in which the “4” symbol is the reach symbol 224a. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), and the third special notice effect (any special notice effect) is executed from now on. Will be notified.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the special advance notice effect A, the special advance notice effect B, and the special advance notice effect C are executed in the order of execution when the special advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times. Not limited to such an embodiment, it may be executed in a selected order by lottery. That is, the special advance notice effect C, the special advance notice effect B, and the special advance notice effect A may be executed in this order, or the special advance notice effect C, the special advance notice effect A, and the special advance notice effect B may be executed in this order. Further, when the special notice effect is executed a plurality of times, the same special notice effect may not be executed, or the same special notice effect may be executed. For example, depending on the lottery, the special advance notice effect A, the special advance notice effect A, and the special advance notice effect A may be executed in this order, or the special advance notice effect A, the special advance notice effect C, and the special advance notice effect C may be executed in this order. You may. Even in such a case, if the number of special notice effects to be executed is the same, the jackpot reliability does not change depending on the execution order and the type to be executed. %, If there are three, it is assumed that the jackpot reliability of 80% is shown.

FIG. 66 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (h). This scene is also a scene in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are in the reach mode. A scene in which the special advance notice effect C227 (third specific advance notice effect), which is the third special advance notice effect, is executed in the third advance notice effect display area 227a partitioned by the diagonal line in the central portion of the display screen 7a is shown.

Further, in the special advance notice effect C227, unlike the execution timings of the special advance notice effect A and the special advance notice effect B, the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol after the start of the variable display of the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (the first stop symbol and the first stop symbol). 2 It is an effect that is executed at the timing (when the stop symbol is stopped and displayed). It should be noted that the effect may be executed when the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed and the reach mode is reached. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), and the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect B226) is the third special advance notice effect. Is shown.

FIG. 66 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (i). This scene is also a scene in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed in the reach mode after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol. On the display screen, the special notice effect C227 is terminated, and the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled from the lit state 221b to the non-lighting state 221a (off state), and the special notice effect (special notice effect B226) is controlled. ) Indicates that it has ended.

As described above, the third special notice effect having a different display mode and display area is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol 1, so that the jackpot reliability that the special notice effect notifies the player is , Increases from 30% to 80%. As a result, the player remarkably raises the expectation for the big hit and enhances the interest of the game.

FIG. 66 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (j). In the center of the display screen of FIG. 66 (k), the battle reach 228 (specific reach effect, special effect) in which the specific character 223 (friendly character) displayed in the special notice effect and the enemy character 230 battle is executed. Shows the scene. In this embodiment, the battle reach 228 is a dedicated reach effect (game effect) that is executed when the special notice effect is executed a specific number of times or more (three times or more). In addition, the jackpot reliability of this reach effect is set higher than the jackpot reliability of other reach effects.

In addition, the reach symbol 224a is displayed relatively small on the upper left and right ends of the display screen. In Battle Reach 228, when the specific character 223 (friendly character) wins the enemy character, it becomes a big hit, and when the enemy character wins (the friendly character loses), it becomes a big hit. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the non-lighting state 221a. FIG. 66 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (k). A hit symbol 229 (hit symbol combination, "444") is displayed in the center of the display screen, indicating that a big hit has been achieved. In addition, a big hit game is executed after this. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the non-lighting state 221a.

In the above-described execution mode, an example in which the reach mode 224 is obtained when the special notice effect is executed has been described, but even when the special notice effect is executed, the pattern is removed without becoming the reach mode 224. May be stopped and displayed. Further, when the number of executions of the special advance notice effect becomes a predetermined number (for example, two) or more, the reach mode (reach effect, specific effect) may be executed without fail. Further, even when a predetermined number of special advance notice effects are executed and the reach mode is established, there may be a time when the jackpot is reached and a time when the hit is missed. Further, when the number of executions of the special notice effect is a predetermined number or more (for example, 4 or more), a big hit may be made (always via the reach effect).

Next, other execution modes of the above-mentioned special notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In the above-described execution mode of the special notice effect, each special notice effect having a different effect mode executes (starts) the next special notice effect after executing the special notice effect and ending (starting). Indicated. The execution mode shown in FIG. 67 is the execution of a predetermined special advance notice effect (for example, special advance notice effect A) when the special advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times (plurality, a plurality of types) in accordance with the variable display of the effect symbol. It shows a mode in which at least a part of the period overlaps with the execution period of another special notice effect (for example, special notice effect B).

In FIG. 67 (a), the variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed, and the variable display of the three (all) effect symbols of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is started. It shows a scene immediately after. At the lower right of the display screen 7a, a special notice number notification unit 231 indicating the number of times the special notice effect is executed is provided. Since the display number of the notification unit is reset (initialized) each time the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (the display mode of the special advance notice number notification unit 231 in FIG. 67A indicates the reset state), the game The person can easily and surely grasp the number of executions of the special advance notice effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the effect symbol only by looking at the display mode (execution number) shown in the special advance notice number notification unit 231. ..

FIG. 67 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (a). This scene is a scene (first timing) immediately after the start of the variable display of the effect symbols, and the three (all) effect symbols (all) of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are (all stopped and displayed). The variable display is continued (without doing). A scene in which the special advance notice effect A (first specific advance notice effect) 222 is executed is shown in the first advance notice effect display area 222a partitioned by the diagonal line on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed) with the execution of the special advance notice effect A, and the currently executing advance notice effect (special notice effect A222) is displayed. It shows that it is a special notice production. The lighting timing of the effect notification unit may be the timing before the execution of the special advance notice effect, may be substantially the same as the execution of the special advance notice effect, or the special advance notice effect is being executed, as in the above-described execution mode. However, it may be after execution.

In addition, the special advance notice number notification unit 231 at the lower right of the display screen displays that the number of executions of the special advance notice effect has been reduced to once with the execution of the special advance notice effect A (first specific advance notice effect) 222. Aspects (execution number 231a) are shown. As a result, the player can recognize that the special advance notice effect is executed by the execution of the effect notification unit (additional effect) and that the special advance notice effect is being executed, and can surely grasp the number of times the special advance notice effect is executed. It will be possible.

FIG. 67 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (b). This scene shows a scene in which the special notice effect B226, which is the second special notice effect, is executed at the second timing in which only the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the first stop symbol is stopped and displayed). In this execution mode, unlike the above-described execution mode, the special advance notice effect A222 is being executed (displayed) in the first advance notice effect display area 222a, and the special advance notice effect B226 is in the second advance notice effect display area 226a. It shows the scene where (the second specific notice production) was executed.

Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect B226) is the special advance notice effect. There is. Further, regarding the lighting control of the effect notification unit 221 in this execution mode, the non-lighting state 221a is temporarily set at the timing after the special advance notice effect A222 is executed and before the special advance notice effect B is started, and the special advance notice is set. The lighting state 221a may be controlled again with the execution of the effect B226, or after the special advance notice effect A is executed, the lighting state may be set in a predetermined display mode during the execution period of the special advance notice effect. It may be 221b.

Further, in the special advance notice number notification unit 231 at the lower right of the display screen, the number of executions of the special advance notice effect is 2 in association with the execution of the special advance notice effect B (second specific advance notice effect) 226 which is the second special advance notice effect. A display mode (number of executions 231a) indicating that the number of times has been reached is shown. As a result, the player can recognize that the special advance notice effect is executed by the execution of the effect notification unit (additional effect) and that the special advance notice effect is being executed, and can surely grasp the number of times the special advance notice effect is executed. It will be possible.

FIG. 67 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (c). In this scene, the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed), and the special advance notice effect is the third special advance notice effect. It shows the scene where C227 was executed. In this execution mode, the special advance notice effect A222 is executed in the first advance notice effect display area 222a, and the special advance notice effect B226 is being executed (as displayed) in the second advance notice effect display area 226a, and the third advance notice effect is displayed. In the display area 227a, a scene in which the special advance notice effect C227 (third specific advance notice effect) is executed is shown.

Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect B226) is the special advance notice effect. There is. Further, as described above, the lighting control of the effect notification unit 221 in this execution mode is after the special advance notice effect A222 and the special advance notice effect B226 are executed, and before the special advance notice effect C227 is started. At the timing of, the non-lighting state 221a may be temporarily set, and the lighting state 221a may be controlled again with the execution of the special notice effect C227. After the special notice effect A is executed, the special notice effect (special notice effect) may be performed. The lighting state 221b may be set in a predetermined display mode during the execution period of the effect A, the special advance notice effect B, and the special advance notice effect C).

Further, in the special advance notice number notification unit 231 at the lower right of the display screen, the number of executions of the special advance notice effect is 3 in association with the execution of the special advance notice effect C (third specific advance notice effect) 227 which is the third special advance notice effect. A display mode (number of executions 231a) indicating that the number of times has been reached is shown. In the execution mode of this embodiment, since the execution of the special advance notice effect three times is set to the maximum number, the execution of the special advance notice effect is performed at the upper part of the special advance notice number notification unit 231 with the execution of the third special advance notice effect. MAX is displayed indicating that it is the maximum number (maximum jackpot reliability). As a result, the player can recognize that the special advance notice effect is executed by the execution of the effect notification unit (additional effect) and that the special advance notice effect is being executed, and can surely grasp the number of times the special advance notice effect is executed. It will be possible.

FIG. 67 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (d). In the center of the display screen of FIG. 67 (e), the battle reach 228 (specific reach effect, special effect) in which the specific character 223 (friendly character) displayed in the special notice effect and the enemy character 230 battle is executed. Shows the scene. In this embodiment, the battle reach 228 is a dedicated reach effect (game effect) that is executed when the special advance notice effect is executed a specific number of times or more (three times or more), but as another aspect, the special advance notice is provided. The effect may be executed even if the number of times is less than a specified number of times, or may be executed when the special notice effect is not executed.

Further, at the lower right of the display screen, the special advance notice number notification unit 231 indicating the maximum number is displayed as the maximum number notification effect 231b by changing the display mode. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the production and enhance the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, each special notice effect is executed (displayed) at a position (first notice effect display area, second notice effect display area, third notice effect display area) corresponding to each on the display screen. Aspects have been described. FIG. 68 describes a mode in which each special notice effect is executed at a common position (special notice effect display area 232) on the display screen.

FIG. 68A is a scene (first timing) in which the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed and immediately after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the left effect symbol and the middle effect symbol are shown. , The three (all) effect symbols on the right effect pattern continue to be displayed in a variable manner (without stopping display even once). In the special notice effect display area 232 in the central part of the display screen 7a, the scene where the special notice effect A (first specific notice effect) 222 is executed is shown. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed) with the execution of the special advance notice effect A, and the currently executing advance notice effect (special notice effect A222) is displayed. It shows that it is a special notice production. In addition, the special advance notice number notification unit 231 at the lower right of the display screen displays that the number of executions of the special advance notice effect has been reduced to once with the execution of the special advance notice effect A (first specific advance notice effect) 222. Aspects (execution number 231a) are shown.

FIG. 68 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 68 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 68 (a). This scene is after the end of the special notice effect A222, and at the second timing in which only the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the first stop symbol is stopped and displayed), the special notice effect B226, which is the second special notice effect. Shows a scene executed in the special notice effect display area 232 in the central portion of the display screen 7a, which is the same as the display area of the special notice effect A222.

Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect B226) is the special advance notice effect. There is. Further, in the special advance notice number notification unit 231 at the lower right of the display screen, the number of executions of the special advance notice effect is 2 in association with the execution of the special advance notice effect B (second specific advance notice effect) 226 which is the second special advance notice effect. A display mode (number of executions 231a) indicating that the number of times has been reached is shown.

FIG. 68 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 68 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 68 (b). This scene is after the end of the special notice effect B226, and at the third timing in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed). It shows the scene where the special notice effect C227, which is the third special notice effect, is executed. Further, the effect notification unit 221 above the display screen 7a is controlled to the lighting state 221b (additional effect is executed), indicating that the currently executing advance notice effect (special advance notice effect B226) is the special advance notice effect. There is. Further, in the special advance notice number notification unit 231 at the lower right of the display screen, the number of executions of the special advance notice effect is 3 in association with the execution of the special advance notice effect C (third specific advance notice effect) 227 which is the third special advance notice effect. A display mode (number of executions 231a) indicating that the number of times has been reached is shown.

FIG. 68 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 68 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 68 (c). In the center of the display screen of FIG. 68 (d), the battle reach 228 (specific reach effect, special effect) in which the specific character 223 (friendly character) displayed in the special notice effect and the enemy character 230 battle is executed. Shows the scene. As described above, in the present execution mode, when the special advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times in accordance with the variable display of one effect symbol, the special advance notice effect display provided in the substantially central portion of the new display screen. In the area, it is executed after the previous special notice effect is completed. That is, since a plurality of special advance notice effects are not executed in duplicate at the same time and each special advance notice effect is executed at different timings, the player understands that the special advance notice effect has been executed. It is easy to enhance the game entertainment.

In the above-described execution mode, the special notice effect is executed by changing the display mode on the display screen (liquid crystal display screen), and the additional effect is performed by displaying a display unit (LED, lamp) different from the display screen. It was executed by changing it. Instead of such an aspect, the additional effect may be executed by the movable member. For example, the movable member is dropped immediately before the execution of the special notice effect, and the special notice effect is executed while the moving member is being dropped. Further, when executing the special notice effect after the second time, the same operation may be performed, or the operation mode of the movable member may be changed (the operation position is different) from the second time and the third time to entertain the game. May be increased. By adopting such a mode, the execution of the special notice effect is appealed to the player, and the game interest is enhanced. Further, the display mode of the display unit (LED, lamp) described above may be different from that of the first display mode in the second and third times. Further, both the special advance notice effect and the additional effect may be executed as changes in the display mode in different display areas on the same display screen.

(Shuffle notice production)
Next, the shuffle notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the sixth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 69 Nobi and FIG. 70. In the shuffle notice effect 253 of the present embodiment, a display frame image 243 showing a predetermined game effect (reach effect, for example, jack reach, etc.) once displayed (still displayed) is displayed as a frame image constituting the display frame image 243. This is a game effect (notice effect) in which scroll display (variable display) is performed on another display frame image while maintaining the display form of the unit 241 and the in-frame image unit 242. Further, the plurality of display frame images to be scroll-displayed include a mode in which one or both of the display mode of the in-frame image portion and the display mode of the frame image portion are different. Then, as a result of executing the shuffle notice effect, the game effect (reach effect, etc.) indicated by the in-frame image part of the display frame image that was initially displayed may or may not be changed, and the final The game effect (reach effect) indicated by the in-frame image portion of the display frame image that has been stopped and displayed is executed.

As a result, a game effect with higher reliability than the game effect (reach effect, etc.) shown in the framed image part that was initially displayed may be executed. Can be increased.

FIG. 69A shows a scene immediately after the start of the variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol). Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), there are three first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. It is displayed. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 69 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (a). Further, in FIG. 69 (b), after the three effect symbols are fluctuated for a predetermined time, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (“3” symbol), and the effect symbols are stopped. It shows a scene in which the display mode is the reach mode. Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment has a plurality of reach effects having different display modes and jackpot reliability. In this scene, among the plurality of reach effects, the jack reach (the jackpot reliability is "☆"). A display image (display frame image) suggesting that "1 piece" (about 10%) is executed is displayed (still display). Here, the "still display" refers to a state in which the display frame image (particularly, the frame image portion) is displayed stationary on the display screen without swinging up and down or left and right (shaking display). ..

Specifically, the display frame image 243 is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a. The display frame image 243 (frame image) includes a frame image portion 241 (display frame) having a diagonal pattern that surrounds the periphery of the display frame image in a frame shape, and a frame displayed inside the frame image portion (inside display area). It is composed of (including) an inner image unit 242 (an image in a frame). In FIG. 69 (b), the characters “Jack Reach” between the left and right reach symbols (“3 ↓ 3”) and the reach symbols are displayed as the in-frame image unit 242. Although omitted in this figure, a background pattern and a character image are also displayed.

Further, in a state where the display frame image 243 is still displayed on the display screen, the upper side of the frame image unit 241 is along the upper edge 244 of the display screen (outer edge of the display screen, outer edge of the display area) (of the display screen). (Approximately parallel to the upper edge) is displayed. Further, the lower side of the frame image portion 241 is displayed along the lower edge 244 (lower edge) of the display screen. Further, the right side of the frame image unit 241 is displayed along the right edge 244 (right edge) of the display screen. Further, the left side of the frame image unit 241 is displayed along the left edge 244 (left edge) of the display screen. In the embodiment of the present embodiment, all the sides (peripheries) of the frame image portion constituting the frame portion of the display frame image are displayed along the peripheral edge (edge) of the display screen. Not limited to such an aspect, at least a part (may be at least one side) of the frame image part constituting the frame part of the display frame image is displayed along at least a part of the peripheral edge (edge, outer edge) of the display screen. It may be configured to be.

FIG. 69 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (b). In FIG. 69 (c), the display frame image 243 (frame image) that was still displayed in FIG. 69 (b) is the display form (display shape, display) of the display frame image (frame image portion and in-frame image portion). A scene in which the movement is displayed (shaking display) in the first mode (first moving mode) is shown above the display screen without breaking the balance). In this way, after the display frame image (predetermined reach effect) is once statically displayed and shown, the display frame image is displayed vertically or horizontally, etc., while maintaining the display form of the frame image portion and the frame image portion. By making the display (moving display) sway, the occurrence of the shuffle time effect 253 that can change the displayed display frame image (predetermined reach effect) is announced.

FIG. 69 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (c). In FIG. 69 (d), similarly to FIG. 69 (c), the display frame image 243 (frame image) is the display form (display shape, display balance) of the display frame image (frame image portion and in-frame image portion). A scene in which the movement is displayed (shaking display) in the first mode (first moving mode) is shown at the bottom of the display screen without breaking (while maintaining). The movement mode (first mode) from the static display shown in FIGS. 69 (c) and 69 (d) is referred to as a shaking display (first movement effect). In the shaking display (first movement effect), the display frame image 243 displayed in the still display is up and down (or) within a range that does not disappear from the display area of the display screen, that is, within a specific movement range (first amount). / And left and right) refers to a display mode in which the display is moved and displayed.

FIG. 69 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (d). In FIG. 69 (e), the shuffle notice effect 253 that can change the displayed display frame image (predetermined reach effect) from the shaking display (first movement effect) shown in FIGS. 69 (c) and (d). Shows the scene where the execution of is confirmed. In the substantially center of the display screen, the characters "shuffle time" are superimposed on the display frame image 243, and below that, a button pattern 245 prompting the operation of the effect button 63 and an operation instruction image 246 are displayed. The player sees the characters of "shuffle time" and recognizes that the shuffle notice effect 253 will be executed (execution has been confirmed), and enhances the interest of the game.

In the embodiment of the present embodiment, the characters such as "shuffle time" are displayed from the shaking display (first movement effect) shown in FIGS. 69 (c) and 69 (d), and the shuffle notice effect 253 is executed. An example is shown. In addition to such an execution pattern, the display frame image 243 that has been shaken and displayed is still displayed again from the shaking display (first movement effect), and is shown as it is by the frame image unit 242 of the display frame image 243. It is assumed that a game production (reach production, in this case, "Jack Reach") may be performed. Therefore, the player can increase the expectation for the execution of the shuffle notice effect and increase the tension even if the shaking display with a small movement width starts from the static display.

FIG. 69 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (e). In FIG. 69 (f), a plurality of display frame images 243 are based on the player pressing the effect button 63 (inputting to the input means) in accordance with the operation instruction of the effect button 63 shown in FIG. 69 (e). Shows the scene where scroll display (variable display) is started. As shown in FIG. 69 (f), the display frame image 243 showing the jack reach that was initially displayed (still displayed) is moved and displayed above the display screen while maintaining the display form, and is displayed on the display screen. From the bottom, a new display frame image 243 showing the queen reach appears, and the display is moved and displayed from the bottom to the top of the display screen. Similarly, the display frame image 243 showing the queen reach also performs scroll display (variable display, moving display) while maintaining the display form.

From the bottom of the display screen, the display frame image 243 showing the newly appearing queen reach is the in-frame image portion 242 of the left and right reach symbols (“3 ↓ 3”) and the “queen reach” between the reach symbols. The characters are displayed. Although omitted in this figure, a background pattern and a character image are also displayed.

As described above, the shuffle notice effect 253 displays the game effect (jack reach) shown by the initially statically displayed display frame image 243 by scrolling and displaying a plurality of display frame images having different display modes of the in-frame image unit. By doing so, it is an effect that can be changed to another game effect (a game effect having a different jackpot reliability, a game effect having a different display mode). As a result of executing the shuffle notice effect, the same game effect (for example, Jack Reach) as the game effect (for example, Jack Reach) shown in the initially statically displayed display frame image may be executed.

The plurality of scroll-displayed display frame images 243 may include those having different display modes of the in-frame image unit 242, those having different display modes of the frame image unit 241, and those having different reach symbols 8. Further, although the display mode of the in-frame image portion is different, the display mode of the frame image portion may be the same display frame image, and there is a display frame image in which both the in-frame image portion and the frame image portion are different in the display mode. Alternatively, there may be a display frame image in which the in-frame image portion, the frame image portion, and the reach pattern are all different. Of course, a plurality of scroll-displayed display frame images 243 may have display frame images of the same frame image portion, and depending on the execution pattern, all of them may have display frame images of the same frame image portion. good. In this case, even if the shuffle notice effect is executed, the same game effect as the original is executed.

Further, when the shuffle notice effect is executed, only the game effect having a jackpot reliability equal to or higher than the jackpot reliability of the game effect shown in the initially statically displayed display frame image may be selected (executed). By doing so, when the shuffle notice effect is executed, the game effect with a higher hit reliability than the game effect (reach effect, character effect) shown in the display frame image initially statically displayed is executed. Or, at least the game production with the same jackpot reliability is executed, so that the player's expectation for the shuffle notice production can be remarkably increased.

FIG. 70 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (f). FIG. 70 (g) shows a scene in which the scroll display is further advanced from the scene shown in FIG. 69 (f). Specifically, the display frame image 243 showing the jack reach is in a state where only a part of the lower part can be visually recognized at the upper part of the display screen, and the display frame image 243 showing the queen reach is in a state where the whole can be visually recognized. There is.

FIG. 70 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (g). FIG. 70 (h) shows a scene in which the scroll display is further advanced from the scene shown in FIG. 70 (g). Specifically, the display frame image 243 showing the queen reach is in a state where the frame image portion 241 on the upper side is cut off (not visible) at the upper part of the display screen, and the display frame image 243 showing the queen reach is displayed from below. A new display frame image 243 showing the king reach has appeared, and only the upper side thereof can be visually recognized. In the newly appearing display frame image 243 showing the king reach, the characters "King reach" between the left and right reach symbols ("7 ↓ 7") and the reach symbols are displayed as the in-frame image portion 242. .. Although omitted in this figure, a background pattern and a character image are also displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 (f), 70 (g), and (h), the movement display (second movement effect) of the display frame image 243 after the start of the shuffle notice effect displays a plurality of display frame images, respectively. It is the same in that it moves and displays while maintaining its form. On the other hand, the movement display (second movement effect) is performed in the second mode (second movement mode) in which the movement amount of the display frame image is larger than that in the above-mentioned shaking display. The moving speed of the display frame image in the moving display (second moving effect) in the second aspect is faster than the moving speed of the display frame image in the moving display (variable display) of the shaking display (first moving effect). And. In the movement display (second movement effect) in the second mode (second movement mode), the display frame image 243 to be displayed exceeds the display area of the display screen (a mode in which it disappears from the display area), that is, a specific A display mode in which a movement is displayed up and down (or / and left and right) with a movement amount (second amount) larger than the movement range (first amount).

Here, the jack reach, queen reach, and king reach shown in the respective display frame images have different jackpot reliability when executed, and the jack reach jackpot reliability is "☆ 1" (big hit reliability). : About 10%), the jackpot reliability of Queen Reach is "☆ 3" (big hit reliability: about 20%), and the jackpot reliability of King Reach is "☆ 5" (big hit reliability: about 20%). 50%). In addition, it has a plurality of production symbols as the production symbols that can be reach symbols, and the "7" symbol (second symbol) is a big hit than the case where the "3" symbol (first symbol) is a big hit. In this case, the game profit obtained by the player may be larger. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game when a jackpot is obtained with the "7" symbol (second symbol) may be increased, the number of game profits (prize balls) that can be obtained may be increased, or the jackpot may be increased. The gaming state after the end of the game may be an advantageous state (high probability state, small hit RUSH state in which a prize ball can be obtained by a small hit).

FIG. 70 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (h). In FIG. 70 (i), following the movement display in the second aspect, a movement display (second movement effect) in which the movement speed (scroll display speed) of a plurality of display frame images is increased is performed. , A scene in which a button pattern 245 and an operation instruction image 246 for urging the player to operate the effect button 63 are displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen. The high-speed movement display of the plurality of display frame images shown in FIG. 70 (i) is referred to as a movement display (second movement effect, third movement effect) in the third mode (third movement mode). The moving speed of the display frame image in the moving display (third moving effect) in the third aspect is faster than the moving speed of the display frame image in the moving display (second moving effect) in the second aspect. ..

FIG. 70 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (i). FIG. 70 (j) shows a scene in which the player presses the effect button 63 (inputs to the input means) according to the operation instruction of the effect button 63 shown in FIG. 70 (i). On the display screen, an operation image 247 showing that the player has operated the effect button is displayed. In the scene where the movable decorative member 14 moves (falls) in front of the display screen 7a based on the player operating according to the operation instruction of the effect button during the movement display (third movement effect) in the third aspect. be. The character display of "high-speed scrolling" displayed on the display screen indicates that a plurality of display frame images are in a state of being scrolled at high speed.

In this embodiment, a movable decorative member 14 that can move up and down is provided above the display screen 7a, and the movable decorative member 14 accompanies a game effect with high jackpot reliability, a predetermined game effect, or the like. , Operates in a predetermined operation mode. In the present embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 is provided at a first position (positioned at the first position) above the display screen 7a so as not to interfere with the visibility of the display screen in the normal state (non-operating state). Based on the operation of the button, it moves to a second position (located in the second position) that hinders the visibility of the display screen in front of the display screen. Then, the movable decorative member 14 at the second position returns to the first position after a lapse of a predetermined time.

FIG. 70 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (j). In FIG. 70 (k), of the plurality of display frame images that were being scrolled at high speed based on the player operating the effect button, the predetermined display frame image 243 was stopped and displayed. It shows the execution scene. In this execution mode, among the scroll-displayed display frame images, the display frame image showing the game effect (king reach) with the highest jackpot reliability is changed to a stop display (still display), and the reach symbol is further displayed. Since the pattern has been changed to "7", which is advantageous to the player, the player significantly enhances the interest of the game.

Of the plurality of display frame images that were being scrolled at high speed shown in FIG. 70 (k), the final effect 250 that stops and displays the predetermined display frame image is based on (accompanied by) the operation of the effect button. It may be said that it is executed, or it may be said that it is executed based on (accompanied by) the operation (movement of the movable member) of the movable decorative member 14. Further, the display frame image displayed in the final effect is also statically displayed while maintaining the display form of the frame image portion and the frame image portion.

In addition, from the movement display (third movement effect) in the third aspect of scrolling and displaying a plurality of display frame images at high speed, the movement display of the display frame image to be executed toward the stop based on the operation of the effect button is displayed. It is referred to as a movement display in the fourth aspect (fourth movement mode). It is assumed that the moving display of the fourth aspect has a slower moving speed of the display frame image than the moving display of the third aspect (high-speed scrolling).

FIG. 70 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (k). FIG. 70 (l) shows a scene in which the king reach, which is the reach effect 248 shown by the in-frame image unit 242 of the display frame image 243 shown in the final effect 250 of FIG. 70 (k), is executed. In King Reach, the king ally character 251 battles with the enemy character 252, and if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the enemy character wins, it becomes a miss. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen, there is a reliability display indicating that the jackpot reliability is ☆ 5.

In this way, in the shuffle notice effect, the display frame image suggesting the predetermined reach effect is statically displayed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol, and then the display frame image is displayed in the frame image portion and the frame. While maintaining the display form of the inner image unit, a plurality of display frame images having different display modes are displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the player understands that a reach effect different from the reach effect shown in the statically displayed display frame image can be executed, and the display frame image is variablely displayed while maintaining the display form (size). , Easy to understand the game production (reach production) to be executed. Further, by operating the effect button from the state where the plurality of display frame images are variablely displayed, one of the display frame images is statically displayed again while maintaining the display form. As a result, the game effect (reach effect) indicated by the still-displayed display frame image is executed, and the player raises the expectation for the big hit.

(Character stock production)
Next, the character stock effect (character stock advance notice effect, character acquisition effect), which is the advance notice effect of the seventh embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 71 and FIG. 75. In the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, in addition to the image display device 7 (first image display device, first display device) described above, a second image display smaller than the image display device 7 is displayed above the image display device 7. A device 261 (second image display device, second display device) is provided. The image display device 7 and the second image display device 261 are separate display devices, and although not shown, both are connected to the image control board 100, and the image display device 7 and the second image display device 261 are In each case, the display is controlled by the sub control board 90 and the image control board 100 (sub control unit) based on the signal from the main control board 80 (main control unit).

Further, the effect symbol 8 is mainly displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 (may be displayed on the second image display device), and the game effects such as the background effect and the character effect are displayed on the image display device 7 and the second image display device 7. 2 It is displayed on both image display devices 261.

The character stock effect 262 of the present embodiment is a notice effect (game effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbol, and is a predetermined character (character) accompanying the operation of the effect button (input to the input means). It is a production that acquires A, B, C). The characters acquired in the character stock effect 262 are stocked for a predetermined period (execution period of one or a plurality of variable displays), and the effect is executed using the stock character in the release battle reach executed thereafter.

Further, since the acquired character (stock character) is stocked for a long time over a plurality of consecutive variable display periods, it is easy for the player to recognize the stocked character for a long time (long time). In addition, the first stock display unit 269 (first display screen, first character display unit) of the first display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and the second display screen 261a of the second image display device 261. 2 It is displayed on both the stock display unit 270 (second display screen, second character display unit). Further, on the first display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, when a reach effect (particularly, a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability) is executed, the stock display of the first stock display unit is temporarily displayed. In some cases, the display is hidden and the display is controlled mainly for the reach effect. On the other hand, on the second display screen 261a of the second image display device 261, even during the execution of such a reach effect, the stock display of the second stock display unit is not hidden, but is always in the display state, and the player Is always able to confirm the stock character, giving a sense of security. As a result, even if the stock period of the character is long, the stocked character can be easily and surely recognized, the player is relieved, and the game effect (release) using the stock character to be executed after that is performed. It is possible to raise the expectation for (battle reach) (expectation for big hit). In addition, this will enhance the interest of the game. The display mode of the stock character on the first display screen and the second display screen will be described later.

FIG. 71A shows a scene immediately after the start of the variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol). Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), there are three first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. It is displayed. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 71 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 71 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 71 (a). Further, in FIG. 71B, the character stock effect 262 (character acquisition effect) is generated on the first display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 at a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol. Indicates a scene in which the character display of "character acquisition chance" indicating "Character acquisition chance" is executed, that is, a scene in which the character stock effect 262 is started.

FIG. 71 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 71 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 71 (b). In FIG. 71 (c), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the effect symbol 8 whose variable display is being continued is displayed small in the upper right corner of the first display screen 7a, and is displayed in the center of the first display screen. The button pattern 263 corresponding to the effect button 63, the arrow-shaped operation instruction image 265 suggesting that the operation of the effect button 63 is pressed, and the operable period 264 indicating the period during which the operation of the effect button is effective are displayed. The player can acquire a predetermined character from a plurality of predetermined characters by operating the effect button within a predetermined operation valid period according to the suggestion display.

FIG. 71 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 71 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 71 (c). FIG. 71 (d) shows a scene in which the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, the player presses the effect button 63 according to the operation suggestion, and the character A266 is acquired (GET) accordingly. There is.

FIG. 71 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 71 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 71 (d). FIG. 71 (e) shows a scene in which the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed and the character A266 acquired in FIG. 71 (d) is stock-displayed in a predetermined display area. As described above, the characters stocked in the character stock effect 262 are used for the game effect (release battle reach) executed in accordance with the variable display of the effect symbol at a predetermined timing later. Also, depending on the type and number of stocked characters (specific characters have high jackpot reliability) and number (the larger the number, the higher the jackpot reliability, the jackpot confirmation with a specific number or more, etc.), you win in the release battle reach (big hit). The possibilities are different.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (e), in the right display area of the first display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, the first stock display unit 269 (first) for displaying the stocked characters is displayed. A display screen (first character display unit) is provided, and a plurality of stock characters can be displayed by partitioning the display area of the first stock display unit. In FIG. 71 (e), the character A suggestion pattern 266a indicating the stocked (acquired) character A is displayed. The character stock effect 262 is executed over a plurality of variable displays. Further, the first image display device 7 (first display screen 7a) is a display device that mainly displays an effect symbol and a game effect (notice effect, reach effect, jackpot game effect). Therefore, during the execution of the character stock effect, a game effect unrelated to the character stock effect may be executed. In such a case, in order not to reduce the taste of the game effect, the game effect is executed using the entire first display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 (with the first stock display unit hidden). May be done.

Even in such a case, the second stock is displayed on the second display screen 261a of the second image display device 261 (second image display device, second display device) so that the player can always recognize (confirm) the stocked character. A display unit 270 (second display screen, second character display unit) is provided. The second stock display unit 270 can also display the stocked characters. In FIG. 71 (e), the character A suggestion pattern 266b indicating the stocked (acquired) character A is displayed. Further, the character suggestion pattern displayed on the second stock display unit is in the display state even when the character suggestion pattern displayed on the first stock display unit is hidden, and the player is in the character stock. It is always possible to check the characters stocked by the production.

Further, the character suggestion pattern displayed on the first stock display unit and the character suggestion pattern displayed on the second stock display unit may have different display modes as shown in FIG. 71 (e), and are the same. It may be a display mode. These are displayed in a corresponding relationship (association) with each other, and are stocked regardless of whether the character suggestion pattern displayed on the first stock display unit or the character suggestion pattern displayed on the second stock display unit is viewed. It is possible to grasp which character the character is. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (e), both the character suggestion pattern displayed on the first stock display unit and the character suggestion pattern displayed on the second stock display unit correspond to the character A. A pattern (character "A") indicating that the pattern is displayed is displayed, and the player must accurately understand that the suggested pattern indicates the character A even if these display modes are different. Can be done.

In addition, the effect of displaying (displaying) the character suggestion pattern indicating the acquired predetermined character on the first stock display unit by the character stock effect is also referred to as "first stock effect 271 (first special effect)". say. In addition, the effect of displaying (displaying) the character suggestion pattern indicating the acquired predetermined character on the second stock display unit by the character stock effect is also referred to as "second stock effect 272 (second special effect)". say.

FIG. 71 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 71 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 71 (e). In FIG. 71 (f), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the three effect symbols 8 for which the variable display is being executed are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the out-of-display mode of "345". It shows the scene that was done. Note that FIG. 71 (f) shows that the stop symbol (“345”) is swaying and fluctuating because the temporary stop is being displayed.

FIG. 72 (g) shows a scene in which the variation display that was being executed in FIG. 71 (f) ends. In FIG. 72 (g), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed. Further, based on the passage (end time) of the fluctuation display time of the effect symbol, the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop display) of the stop symbol (“345”) shown in FIG. 71 (f) is completely stopped (no shaking). It shows how the fixed stop is displayed. The fixed stop display (fixed stop display effect 273) of this effect symbol is executed for 0.5 seconds, and although it is a short time, it is completely recognizable by the player for 0.5 seconds without displaying fluctuations such as shaking. By displaying the stop at, it is clearly shown to the player that the variable display of the effect symbol has been completed.

In the effect symbol confirmation stop display effect 273 (symbol confirmation effect), the sub control board 90 and the image control board 100 (sub control unit) issue a symbol stop command instructing the effect symbol confirmation stop display from the main control board 80. This is because the display control for displaying the effect symbol as a fixed stop is performed based on the reception. The effect symbols whose display is controlled by the sub control board are displayed and controlled in synchronization with the special symbol whose display is controlled by the main control board and the start and end (fixed stop display) of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (g), at the same time (together) that the effect symbol executes the fixed stop display effect 273, the first stock effect and the second stock are executed by the first stock display unit. A predetermined final effect is also executed for the second stock effect executed on the display unit. Specifically, in the first stock effect executed by the first stock display unit, similarly to the fixed stop display effect of the effect symbol, the change effect that changes the shaking fluctuation and the display mode of the character is completely stopped. 1 Stock finalization effect 274 (first finalization effect) is executed. In addition, the second stock effect executed by the second stock display unit is the second stock in which the change effect such that the shaking fluctuation and the display mode of the character are changed is completely stopped, as in the case of the fixed stop display effect of the effect symbol. The final effect 275 (second final effect) is executed.

The fixed stop display effect, the first stock fixed effect, and the second stock fixed effect are all regarded as complete stop effects in which the shaking fluctuation and change effects are completely stopped, and the execution period is also executed for 0.5 seconds. .. That is, the fixed stop display effect, the first stock fixed effect, and the second stock fixed effect are fixed effects that are executed synchronously at the same time, and the effect symbols are variable display, the first stock effect, and the first. 2 If any of the stock effects has an error (asynchronous, divergent, or misaligned) with the other effects, the error is corrected (solved) by using the final effect, which is the synchronous effect. ), It becomes possible to resynchronize.

FIG. 72 (h) shows a scene in which the next variation display of the variation display confirmed (finished) in FIG. 72 (g) is started. In FIG. 72 (h), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed. FIG. 72 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (h). In FIG. 72 (i), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the character stock effect 262 (character acquisition effect) is performed at a predetermined timing in a state where the character A is stocked. Indicates a scene in which the character display of "character acquisition chance" indicating that is generated again is executed.

FIG. 72 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (i). FIG. 72 (j) shows a scene in which the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed and the player is urged to operate the effect button. FIG. 72 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (j). FIG. 72 (k) shows a scene in which the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, the player presses the effect button 63 according to the operation suggestion, and the character B267 is acquired (GET) accordingly. There is.

FIG. 72 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (k). In FIG. 72 (l), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the character B267 acquired in FIG. 72 (k) is a predetermined display area of the first stock display unit 269 and the second stock display unit 270. The scenes displayed in stock are shown in. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (l), the first stock display unit 269 contains a character A suggestion pattern 266a indicating the stocked character A and a newly stocked (acquired or added) character B. The character B suggestion pattern 267a to be shown is displayed. In addition, the second stock display unit 270 displays a character A suggestion pattern 266b indicating the stocked character A and a character B suggestion pattern 267b indicating the newly stocked (acquired or added) character B. ..

In this way, when the character stock effect continues for a long period of time, the first stock effect 271 (first special effect) and the second stock effect 272 (second special effect) progress, and the number of characters to be stocked increases. There is. Although not shown, the characters that can be stocked include characters C, D, E, etc. in addition to the above-mentioned characters A and B, and a character suggestion pattern corresponding to these characters C, D, E, etc. Are set respectively.

FIG. 73 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (l) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (l). In FIG. 73 (m), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the three effect symbols 8 for which the variable display is being executed are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the out-of-display mode of “465”. It shows the scene that was done. In addition, in FIG. 73 (m), since the temporary stop display is being displayed, the stop symbol (“345”) is shown to be swaying and fluctuating.

FIG. 73 (n) shows a scene in which the variable display (during the temporary stop display) that was being executed in FIG. 73 (m) ends. In FIG. 73 (n), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the stop symbol (“465”” shown in FIG. 73 (m) is based on the lapse (end time) of the variation display time of the effect symbol. ) Shake fluctuation (temporary stop display) shows a state in which a complete stop (no shake) is displayed and a fixed stop is displayed. In addition, the first stock effect (character A suggested pattern 266a, character B suggested pattern 267a) executed by the first stock display unit and the second stock effect (character A suggested pattern 266b) executed by the second stock display unit. , Character B suggestion pattern 267b) executes the first stock confirmation effect 274 (first confirmation effect) and the second stock confirmation effect 275 (second confirmation effect), respectively, in synchronization with the confirmation stop display effect of the effect symbol. ..

FIG. 73 (o) shows a scene in which the next variation display of the variation display confirmed (finished) in FIG. 73 (n) is started. In FIG. 73 (o), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed. FIG. 73 (p) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (o) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (o). In FIG. 73 (p), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and on the first display screen 7a, after the three effect symbols are fluctuated for a predetermined time, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed. It shows a scene in which the same symbol (“5” symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the stop display mode of the effect symbol is the reach mode in which the “5” symbol is the reach symbol.

FIG. 73 (q) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (p) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (p). In FIG. 73 (q), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the reach symbol (“5”) is displayed small at the upper left and right ends of the first display screen, and the character stock effect is displayed at the center of the screen. It shows a scene in which the characters "stock release" suggesting that the stocked character is released are displayed. Further, the character A (character stock effect) and the character B (character B suggestion pattern) that are stock-displayed on the first stock display portion of the first display screen move to the central portion of the first display screen, and the stock is released. An opening effect indicating that the character is released is executed. In addition, the player recognizes that the release battle reach using the stocked character will be executed, and raises the expectation for the big hit.

FIG. 73 (r) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (q) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (q). In FIG. 73 (r), the stocked characters A and B (friendly characters) are displayed in the central portion of the first display screen 7a, and a scene in which a 2 to 1 battle effect is started by confronting an enemy character. Shown. In this battle production (release battle reach), if the ally character wins the enemy character, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses to the enemy character, it becomes a loss. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (r), when the characters A and B are released, the display of the character A suggestion pattern 266a and the character B suggestion picture 267a disappears from the first stock display unit. , The display of the character A suggestion pattern 266b and the character B suggestion picture 267b disappears from the second stock display unit.

FIG. 74 (s) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (r) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (r). In FIG. 74 (s), the middle effect symbol 8C has the same “5” symbol as the reach symbol, as the ally characters (stocked characters) characters A and B defeat the enemy character and win. The scene where the temporary stop is displayed is shown. The three production symbols (“555”) are executing the shaking fluctuation display. Further, on the second display screen 261a, the characters "WIN" are displayed, and the status of the release battle reach is displayed.

FIG. 74 (t) shows a scene in which the variation display (release battle reach) executed in FIG. 74 (s) is completed, and the variation display of the three production symbols is fixed and stopped with the same “555” jackpot symbol. Is shown. As for the effect symbol, the fixed stop display effect 273 is executed in the display mode of "555". Further, on the second display screen 261a, the characters "big hit" are displayed, and the status of the game is displayed. Although not shown, a jackpot game is executed after this.

As described above, one or more characters are stocked by the character stock effect that can be executed over a plurality of variable displays, and the effect using the stocked characters is executed in the subsequent release battle reach. .. Further, since the jackpot reliability in the release battle reach differs depending on the type of the stocked character and the number of stocked characters, it is possible to maintain a high game interest for a long period of time when the character stock effect is executed. Further, since the character suggestion pattern is displayed on both the first display screen and the second display screen in a corresponding relationship with each other, the player can always confirm the stock character for a long period of time when the character stock effect is executed. , It is possible to play the game with a sense of security and enhance the interest of the game.

Next, when the character stock effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays using FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the first stock effect displayed on the first stock display unit and the first stock effect are displayed. When an error (deviation, deviation) occurs (occurs) between the second stock effect displayed on the second stock display and the effect (display, progress, progress), a forced effect is executed at a predetermined timing. An effect error correction control for achieving consistency between the first stock effect and the second stock effect and eliminating an error in the effect will be described by (fixed effect).

FIG. 74 (a) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (k). In FIG. 74 (a), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the character B suggestion pattern indicating the character B 267 acquired in FIG. 72 (k) is displayed in a predetermined display area of the first stock display unit 269. Although the stock is displayed, the scene is shown in which the display is not displayed on the second stock display unit 270 due to some trouble such as the influence of noise or a reception error of the display control signal or the like. Therefore, the character A suggestion pattern 266a indicating the stocked character A and the character B suggestion pattern 267a indicating the newly stocked (acquired or added) character B are displayed on the first stock display unit 269. .. On the other hand, the second stock display unit 270 displays the character A suggestion pattern 266b indicating the stocked character A, and displays the character B suggestion pattern 267b indicating the newly stocked (acquired or added) character B. There is a discrepancy (error in production) between the display modes of the first stock display unit and the second stock display unit, which should not be matched with each other (the correspondence relationship is inconsistent).

If the situation in which the display mode of the first stock display unit and the display mode of the second stock display unit do not match (there is a deviation) continues in this way, the player cannot recognize which display mode is correct. , I feel distrust in the game production and the pachinko game machine itself, which causes a decline in the game interest. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine, at a predetermined timing (predetermined specific timing) during the execution of the character stock effect 262, there is an error in the effect between the display mode of the first stock display unit and the display mode of the second stock display unit. Execute display control processing to eliminate (misalignment).

FIG. 74 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 74 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 74 (a). In FIG. 74 (b), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the three effect symbols 8 for which the variable display is being executed are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the out-of-display mode of “465”. It shows the scene that was done. Further, since this scene is the timing before the execution of the display control process for eliminating the above-mentioned error (deviation) in the effect, it is different from the display mode of the first stock display unit generated in FIG. 73 (a). , The display mode is different from the display mode of the second stock display unit (error in production).

FIG. 74 (c) shows a scene in which the variable display (during the temporary stop display) that was being executed in FIG. 74 (b) ends (confirmed display). In FIG. 74 (c), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the stop symbol (“465”” shown in FIG. 73 (m) is based on the lapse (end time) of the variation display time of the effect symbol. ) Shake fluctuation (temporary stop display) shows a state in which a complete stop (no shake) is displayed and a fixed stop is displayed. In addition, the first stock effect (character A suggested pattern 266a, character B suggested pattern 267a) executed by the first stock display unit and the second stock effect (character A suggested pattern 266b) executed by the second stock display unit. , Character B suggestion pattern 267b) executes the first stock confirmation effect 274 (first confirmation effect) and the second stock confirmation effect 275 (second confirmation effect), respectively, in synchronization with the confirmation stop display effect of the effect symbol. ..

The first stock confirmation effect 274 (first confirmation effect) and the second stock confirmation effect 275 (second confirmation effect) are the display mode of the first stock display unit and the display mode of the second stock display unit described above. This is a display control process for forcibly eliminating the error in the production. This makes it possible to ensure consistency between the display mode of the first stock display unit and the display mode of the second stock display unit. That is, the display mode of the first stock display unit and the second stock display are performed by the display control process executed at the timing of ending the variable display of the effect symbol and displaying the effect symbol in a fixed stop display (fixed stop command reception timing). It is possible to achieve consistency with the display mode of the unit.

Character information (characters A and B in this example) indicating the stocked characters is stored in the sub-control unit, and the first display device and the display control signal instructing the execution of the final effect based on the stored information are stored in the sub-control unit. A final effect (first stock final effect, second stock) in which the correct character suggestion pattern (character A suggestion pattern and character B suggestion pattern) is displayed on the first display device and the second display device by transmitting to the second display device. Final production) is executed. In addition, each time the fixed stop display is executed, the character stock effect is executed for a long period of time (multiple variable displays) by executing the fixed effect (forced display matching control) based on the stored information. Even in this case, it is possible to periodically ensure the consistency of the display between the first stock display unit and the second stock display unit. In addition, even if there is a discrepancy in display (error in production), it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible.

FIG. 74 (d) shows a scene in which the next variation display of the variation display confirmed (finished) in FIG. 74 (c) is started. In FIG. 74 (d), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and in FIG. 74 (c), a final effect for matching the display modes of the first stock display unit and the second stock display unit is executed. Therefore, the display modes of the first stock display unit and the second stock display unit are displayed with a correct correspondence relationship (both the character A suggestion pattern and the character B suggestion pattern are displayed).

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a different mode for eliminating the effect error (deviation) between the first stock display unit and the second stock display unit will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 75, the first stock effect (first special effect, character suggestion pattern) displayed on the first stock display unit and the second stock effect (second special effect) displayed on the second stock display unit. , Character suggestion pattern) is displayed and controlled with a predetermined correspondence. Specifically, the character suggestion pattern displayed on the first stock display unit and the character suggestion pattern displayed on the second stock display unit are swayed up and down in a corresponding relationship with each other, and the first stock display is displayed. When the character suggestion pattern displayed on the unit moves upward, the character suggestion pattern displayed on the second stock display unit also moves upward accordingly. Further, when the character suggestion pattern displayed on the first stock display unit moves downward, the character suggestion pattern displayed on the second stock display unit also moves downward accordingly.

In this way, the character suggestion pattern (first stock effect) displayed on the first stock display unit and the character suggestion pattern (second stock effect) displayed on the second stock display unit have a predetermined display mode. It is displayed synchronously. This synchronized display may be misaligned (error in production) due to some trouble such as the influence of noise or a reception error of a display control signal or the like. If such a deviation occurs, there is a risk that the production will feel uncomfortable and the interest in the game will be reduced. In such a case, the character suggestion pattern (first stock effect) displayed on the first stock display unit and the second stock display unit by the display control that is forcibly executed at a predetermined timing during the character stock effect execution. The deviation of the production from the character suggestion pattern (second stock production) displayed on the screen is forcibly eliminated to ensure consistency.

FIG. 75 (a) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 71 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 71 (d). FIG. 75A shows a scene in which the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed and the character A266 acquired in FIG. 71D is stock-displayed in a predetermined display area. Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the character A suggestion pattern 266a indicating the character A is displayed on the first stock display unit 269 (first display screen, first character display unit), and the second stock display is performed. A character A suggestion pattern 266b indicating the character A is displayed on the unit 270 (second display screen, second character display unit). Further, the character A suggestion picture 266a and the character A suggestion picture 266b are swayed up and down in the stock display unit, and in FIG. 75A, the character A suggestion picture 266a of the first stock display part 269 is displayed downward. It is moved and displayed, and the character A suggested pattern 266b of the second stock display unit 270 is also moved and displayed downward in synchronization with the character A suggested pattern 266a.

FIG. 75 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (a). The character A suggestion picture 266a and the character A suggestion picture 266b are swayed up and down in the stock display unit, and in FIG. 75B, the character A suggestion picture 266a of the first stock display part 269 is moved and displayed upward. Then, in synchronization with the character A suggestion pattern 266a, the character A suggestion picture 266b of the second stock display unit 270 is also moved and displayed upward.

FIG. 75 (c) shows an execution scene of the variation display after a predetermined number of times from the variation display of FIG. 75 (b). In FIG. 75 (c), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and as a result of executing FIGS. 72 (j) and (k), the character B is newly acquired, and the first stock display unit 269 and The second stock display unit 270 shows a scene in which the character A suggestion pattern indicating the character A and the character B suggestion pattern indicating the character B are displayed, respectively. Further, the character A suggestion picture 266a and the character B suggestion picture 267a of the first stock display unit 269 are moved and displayed downward, and the character A suggestion picture 266b and the character B suggestion picture 267b of the second stock display part 270 are moved upward. It is displayed.

One of the character A suggestion pattern 266a and the character B suggestion picture 267a of the first stock display unit 269 and the character A suggestion picture 266b and the character B suggestion picture 267b of the second stock display part 270 are moved and displayed upward. And the other is also synchronously displayed in a predetermined display mode so as to be moved upward. It is probable that this synchronized display has shifted (an error in the production has occurred) due to some trouble such as the influence of noise or a reception error of the display control signal or the like. Further, since the first stock display unit is provided on the first display screen of the first display device and the second stock display unit is provided on the second display screen of the second display device separate from the first display device, both are provided. If there is a discrepancy in the signal transmission timing to the display devices, or if there is an error in only the display control signal of one of the display devices, the stock effect displayed on the display screens of both display devices (first stock effect). , 2nd stock production), an error in production may occur. Further, since the first stock effect and the second stock effect proceed based on the input to the effect button (input to the input means), noise or some abnormality is generated even when the operation detection signal of the effect button is captured. May occur.

FIG. 75 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (c). In FIG. 75 (d), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the character A suggestion pattern 266a and the character B suggestion picture 267a of the first stock display unit 269 are moved and displayed upward, and the second stock display is displayed. The character A suggestion pattern 266b and the character B suggestion picture 267b of the part 270 are moved and displayed downward. That is, at the time of FIG. 75 (d), the forced display control for matching the display modes is not performed, and the same effect error (deviation) as in FIG. 75 (c) remains. ing.

FIG. 75 (e) shows a scene in which the variation display that was being executed in FIG. 75 (d) ends (confirmed display). In FIG. 75 (e), the character stock effect 262 is continuously executed, and the shake variation (temporary stop display) of the stop symbol (“465”) is based on the passage (end time) of the variation display time of the effect symbol. ) Indicates that the vehicle has completely stopped (no shaking) and the confirmed stop is displayed. Further, the first stock effect (character A suggested pattern 266a, character B suggested pattern 267a) executed by the first stock display unit and the second stock effect (character A suggested pattern 266b) executed by the second stock display unit. , Character B suggestion pattern 267b) is the first stock confirmation effect 274 (the first stock confirmation effect 274) at a predetermined confirmation display position (intermediate position of vertical movement) of the stock display unit, respectively, in synchronization with the confirmation stop display effect of the effect symbol. 1 final production) and 2nd stock final production 275 (2nd final production) are executed.

The first stock confirmation effect 274 (first confirmation effect) and the second stock confirmation effect 275 (second confirmation effect) are the display mode of the first stock display unit and the display mode of the second stock display unit described above. This is a display control process for forcibly eliminating (resynchronizing display again) an error in the effect (misalignment of display mode, misalignment of moving display). After this final effect, the first stock final effect 274 (first final effect) and the second stock final effect 275 (second final effect) are started in synchronization, so that the display mode of the first stock display unit is displayed. And, it is possible to achieve consistency with the display mode of the second stock display unit. That is, the display mode of the first stock display unit and the second stock display are performed by the display control process executed at the timing of ending the variable display of the effect symbol and displaying the effect symbol in a fixed stop display (fixed stop command reception timing). It is possible to achieve consistency with the display mode of the unit.

Similar to the above, the sub-control unit stores character information (characters A and B in this example) indicating the stocked characters, and display control for instructing execution of the final effect based on the stored information. By transmitting a signal to the first display device and the second display device, a definite effect (first) in which the correct character suggestion pattern (character A suggestion pattern and character B suggestion pattern) is displayed on the first display device and the second display device. The stock confirmation effect and the second stock confirmation effect) are executed. In addition, each time the fixed stop display is executed, the character stock effect is executed for a long period of time (multiple variable displays) by executing the fixed effect (forced display matching control) based on the stored information. Even in this case, it is possible to periodically ensure the consistency of the display between the first stock display unit and the second stock display unit. In addition, even if there is a discrepancy in display (error in production), it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible.

FIG. 75 (f) shows a scene in which the variable display of the next effect symbol of FIG. 75 (e) is started. In FIG. 75 (f), by executing the final effect of FIG. 75 (e), the vertical movement is started in synchronization with the final display position (aligning the deviations), so that the first stock display unit is displayed. The display mode and the display mode of the second stock display unit are synchronously displayed with a correct correspondence relationship with each other. As shown in FIG. 75 (f), the character A suggestion pattern 266a and the character B suggestion picture 267a of the first stock display unit 269 are moved and displayed downward, and are synchronized with the character A suggestion picture 266a and the character B suggestion picture 267a. The character A suggestion pattern 266b and the character B suggestion picture 267b of the second stock display unit 270 are also moved and displayed upward.

As described above, at the predetermined time (first time) during the execution of the character stock effect, the first stock effect executed on the first display screen of the first display device and the second display screen of the second display device are displayed. Even if there is an error (deviation, deviation) in the production such as mismatch between the second stock effect to be executed and the display target, asynchronous display of the display target, etc., the time to stop and display the effect symbol (1st) By the final effect (first stock final effect, second stock final effect) executed in (2nd period), it is possible to eliminate the error in the effect. As a result, even if the character stock effect is executed for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the disagreement in the effect from expanding or continuing for a long period of time, and to execute a highly tasteful game effect.

In the above-described embodiment, the first stock display unit is provided on the first display screen of the first display device, and the second stock display unit is provided on the second display screen of the second display device separate from the first display device. The mode to be provided has been described. Not limited to such an aspect, the first stock display unit and the second stock display unit may be provided on the first display screen of the first display device, and the same display control may be executed.

[Other Aspect 1]
In the above-described first embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the advance notice effect is maintained while maintaining the number and types of the advance notice effect types to be determined. Only the number of notice effects belonging to the species is reduced. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, in the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the advance notice effect species that can be executed while reducing the number of advance notice effects to be determined as compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state. You may change the type of.

Specifically, in the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52, four types of notice effects such as conversation notice effect, step-up notice effect, cut-in notice effect, and movable part notice effect can be executed. .. On the other hand, in the notice determination table for the low load state of the other aspect 1 shown in FIG. There is. According to this aspect, in a low load state, a total of 15 types of advance notice effects belonging to 4 types of advance notice effect types are targeted for determination, and 0 to a maximum of 4 advance notice effects can be executed. Further, in a high load state, a total of 6 types of advance notice effects belonging to 4 types of advance notice effect types are targeted for determination, and 0 to a maximum of 4 advance notice effects can be executed. The step-up notice effect and the cut-in notice effect are the notice effect type (notice effect) dedicated to the low load state, and the pattern notice effect and the background notice effect are the notice effect type (notice effect) dedicated to the high load state. Will be done.

As a result, the advance notice effect dedicated to the low load state is provided even in the low load state, and the advance notice effect dedicated to the high load state is provided even in the high load state. Therefore, the control load of the sub control unit becomes an issue. While preventing it, it is possible to diversify the game production in both states. Further, in the other aspect 1, although some of the advance notice effect types are different, all the feasible advance notice effect types may be changed to different advance notice effect types. Further, in the advance notice effect species to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the number of advance notice effects belonging to at least one advance notice effect type is reduced. The number of advance notice effects to which the advance notice effect species belong may be reduced. Further, for all the advance notice effect types, the number of advance notice effects to which they belong may be fixed to one advance notice effect.

Here, the pattern notice effect is a possibility of becoming a big hit by displaying a pattern such as a predetermined character, a pattern, or a background displayed on the display screen 7a in a pattern different from the normal pattern (special game). It is a notice production showing the feasibility of. For example, the moon character displayed in the background is usually displayed in yellow, but is made into a polka dot pattern at a predetermined timing. As a result, the player is notified that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol having the polka dot pattern is a predetermined degree (for example, 10%) of the possibility of becoming a big hit. In addition, by displaying the moon character in a tiger pattern, it is notified that the possibility of a big hit is higher than that of a polka dot and the possibility of a big hit is high (for example, 50%).

Further, the background notice effect indicates the feasibility of the special game by displaying a specific character on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol). In this example, when a "rainbow" is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is assumed that the possibility of executing the special game is relatively high (for example, 33%).

[Other Aspect 2]
In the above-described second embodiment, the advance notice effect type to be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state is one of the advance notice effect types (4 types) to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state. By fixing to the type (cut-in notice effect), the amount of processing related to the advance notice effect determination process is reduced. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. In the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the second embodiment, one of the advance notice effect types to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state is used as it is (with the same number and types of advance notice effects to which it belongs). ) It is supposed to be used. In this other aspect, instead of this, the content of the advance notice effect type to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state shall be partially changed.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 61 (A), as the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the advance notice effect is determined by fixing to the cut-in advance notice effect type included in the low load state, but the cut-in advance notice is determined. As the advance notice effect belonging to the effect type, it is possible to execute a advance notice effect different from the advance notice effect belonging to the cut-in advance notice effect type to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state. In addition, the number of notice effects belonging to the cut-in notice effect species is increasing. As a result, in the high load state, the number of advance notice effects to be determined is significantly reduced as compared with the low load state, but the number of advance notice effects to which the determination target is limited is increasing. , It is possible to diversify the production mode of the advance notice production type.

Therefore, in the other aspect 2, in the high load state, the number of advance notice effect species to be determined and the number of advance notice effects are reduced (fixed) as compared with the low load state, but the advance notice effect to be determined is determined. Regarding the number of advance notice effects belonging to the species, the high load state is characterized in that it is larger than the low load state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game production in a high load state and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61B, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is fixed to the cut-in advance notice effect type included in the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the advance notice effect type (cut-in) is further fixed. The mode in which the determinable notice effect belonging to the notice effect type) is also fixed is shown. That is, in this aspect, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the advance notice effect determination process, and when it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed, a specific advance notice effect (in this example, the cut-in related to the character C) is always performed. Notice production) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing for the advance notice effect determination process in a high load state as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 61 (C-1) and 61 (C-2), the number of advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice determination table for the high load state is determined by the advance notice determination table for the low load state. Although the number is smaller than the number of the target advance notice production species, the mode in which the number is set to a plurality of advance notice effect species is shown. Specifically, the cut-in notice production type and the pattern notice production type are to be determined. That is, it is possible to determine and execute up to two types of advance notice effects (notice effects). In addition, some of the notice effect types to be decided in the notice determination table for the high load state are different from the notice effect types to be decided in the notice decision table for the low load state, and some of them are the same rehearsal effect species. However, instead of this, all may be different notice production types, or all may be the same notice production type.

[Other Aspect 3]
Further, as another aspect, it is also possible to set a high load state and a low load state according to the gaming state. Specifically, the first control is a state in which the number of controls related to the game effect (pieces / second) is large, which is obtained by dividing the number of controls related to the game effect that needs to be executed during the variable display of the effect symbol by the average fluctuation time. It is also possible to set a state and a state less than the first control state as a second control state. As an example of this, it is possible to set the second control state as a time-saving state in which the average fluctuation time is short, and the first control state as a non-time-saving state (normal state) in which the average fluctuation time is longer than the time-saving state. Therefore, in the non-time saving state (normal state) in which the first control state (specific flag OFF state) is set, the number of advance notice effects (game effects) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination process (game effect determination process) is secondly controlled. It is possible to execute various game effects by increasing the number of states, and in the time-saving state in which the second control state (specific flag ON state) is set, the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination process. It is possible to prevent the control load of the sub-control unit from becoming an issue by reducing the number of

[Other Aspect 4]
Further, as another aspect, a game effect involving input to the effect button (first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b) may be executed in a high load state. Further, a high load state may be set when the display control amount of the board lamp, the frame lamp, or the like becomes abnormal by a predetermined amount. Further, a high load state may be set when a game effect accompanied by motion control of a movable portion is executed, or when a game effect accompanied by motion control of a movable portion and a particularly large amount of control processing related to motion control is performed. In either case, the specific flag shall be turned ON when the load is high.

[Other Aspect 5]
Further, as another aspect, when the low load state is set during the big hit game, the notice effect is determined during the big hit game based on a notice effect determination table or the like different from that during the non-big hit game. Then, the variable display to be determined such as the advance notice effect may be the variable display related to the pending information for which the variable start condition is not satisfied. That is, during the big hit game in which the load on the control processing of the sub-control unit is low, the advance notice effect of the execution schedule related to the hold information is determined using the advance notice determination table for the low load state in which various advance notice effects can be determined. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute various game effects even in a high load state after that.

In addition, during the low load state (during the big hit game), a predetermined number of notice effect execution patterns that can execute one or more notice effects are created and stored, and the variation display of each effect symbol after the end of the big hit is displayed. It is also possible to select from the advance notice effect execution pattern and execute it each time it starts. This notice effect execution pattern can be updated each time a low load state (big hit game) occurs.

[Other Aspect 6]
It should be noted that, among the first, third, and fourth embodiments, two or more configurations may be combined to set a state in which a high load state is determined, that is, a state in which the specific flag is turned ON. For example, the specific flag may be turned ON at both times during the execution of the effect start process at the time of entering the ball and the execution of the variable effect start process, and the specific flag may be turned OFF at other times. Further, when the effect start process at the time of entering the ball and the variable effect start process are executed in duplicate, it may be regarded as a high load state and the specific flag may be turned ON. Further, the application patterns of the notice determination table for the low load state and the notice determination table for the high load state described in the examples and other embodiments can be applied to the other embodiments or other embodiments. .. All of these combinations are included in the present invention.

[Other Aspect 7]
Further, in the present embodiment, the value "M" of the effect mode counter is set to a different value depending on the type of hit, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As another aspect, the effect mode set according to the type of hit may be continued until the gaming state changes. Changes in the game state include, for example, the execution of the next big hit game, the change from the high probability state to the low probability state, the change from the open extension state to the non-open extension state, and the time saving state. It may change to a non-time saving state. It also includes the opposite of these aspects.

[Other Aspect 8]
Next, another aspect 3 of Example 1 and Reference Example described above will be described. In the third aspect of the present invention, in the second prize-winning device 36 of the first embodiment and the reference example, a shutter member (also referred to as an “acting member”) that allows or blocks the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39 inside. ) Can be provided. That is, when the second special winning device 36 is provided with the shutter member and the shutter member is in the first state of hindering (preventing) the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39, the ball enters the second big winning opening 35. The game ball has passed through a non-specific area other than the specific area 39, and when the shutter member is in the second state of allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 39, the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35. May be configured to pass through a specific area 39 instead of a non-specific area. The solenoid that drives the shutter member is connected to the main control board 80. When such a shutter member is provided, the shutter member may be controlled to the first state to close the specific area 39 during 1R and 2R when the second big winning opening 35 is opened in the 15R second big hit. ..

By doing so, even if the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 during the opening for a very short time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball is surely prevented from passing through the specific area 39. be able to. Further, in 1R and 2R in the 15R second jackpot, the shutter member is closed when the shutter member is in the second state, and the second prize opening 35 is opened when the shutter member is in the first state. By controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 35, even if the maximum opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is set to a length that allows the game ball to enter sufficiently (for example, 28 seconds), the game can be played in the specific area 39. It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through. When it is desired to pass the game ball through the specific area 39 in the 15R first big hit or the like, the shutter member may be controlled to the second state while the second big winning opening 35 is open. That is, the shutter member may be controlled to the second state during the above-mentioned V effective period (first period). Further, in the first embodiment, it is possible to pass through a specific area even if it is a small hit, but by setting the shutter member in the first state during the small hit game, the game ball is specified during the small hit game. It can be prevented from passing through the area. Further, in addition to this configuration, whether or not the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39 due to the installation location of the specific area 39 and the covering portion provided in front of the player side of the specific area 39. May be a mode that is difficult for the player to see.

[Other Aspect 9]
Whether or not the processing amount of the control related to the game effect is larger than the predetermined amount can be determined by whether or not the processing amount of the control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process is larger than the predetermined amount. When the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process is small, a large amount of processing is performed as the game effect determination process, and the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process is large. In this case, a determination process with a small amount of processing is performed as a game effect determination process. As a result, it is possible to balance the control load related to the game effect control unit by changing the processing amount of the game effect determination process according to the control processing amount (processing state) related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process. .. In addition, it is possible to perform various game effects by controlling appropriate game effects without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit.

Further, in the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, the "game effect" refers to an effect performed using a predetermined character or an effect performed using identification information (effect symbol, special symbol, etc.), for example, a notice effect, Character production and reach production can be mentioned. Further, the game production is considered to belong to any one of the plurality of game production types. Further, as a notice effect, a pseudo-variation notice effect may be provided. The pseudo-variation notice effect is a notice effect that indicates that the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment may be a big hit. It is a production that makes it appear as if it is displayed in a pseudo manner multiple times. For example, "pseudo 1 (pseudo-variation 1)" means that after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, the temporary stop display and the re-variation display are performed once to make it appear that the variation display is performed twice. It is a production, and as the number of pseudo 2 and pseudo 3 increases, the number of pseudo fluctuation displays increases, and at the same time, the jackpot reliability also increases.

Further, in the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, a variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first hit / fail determination or It is possible to provide a special game execution unit capable of executing a special game in which the variable entry port (large winning opening) is in a state where the ball can be entered when the result of the second hit / fail determination is successful. Further, the "starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect, and the "starting port" is The variable start port may be provided separately. In addition, there are a first game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than in the first game state. It can be provided with a game state setting unit to be set to. Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control process of preferentially digesting the second special figure hold over the first special figure hold, the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, is not limited to this, and the first special figure hold is not limited to this. May be a control process that gives priority to the second special figure hold, that is, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine having a specific area 39 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol winning / failing determination is made without having the specific area 39 in the large winning opening. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine in which it is determined whether or not a high probability state is given after the end of the jackpot game based only on the result (type of jackpot symbol displayed stopped). Needless to say, "based on the fact that the special symbol is a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol)", this type of gaming machine is also implemented. The pachinko gaming machine of Example 1 and other types of gaming machines are also included. In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting unit (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

[others]
(Reference Invention 1)
In a gaming machine that has a plurality of effect modes and executes different game effects depending on the effect mode to be executed as in a conventional game machine, the burden of control processing when executing the game effect increases, and the game machine It could not be said that it was the optimum control process, and there was room for improvement. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having various gaming effects, which performs optimal effect control processing and enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
A game production control unit that executes control related to the game production,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entry port to enter a ball when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result.
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, the advance notice effect is not determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the first control state, and to diversify the game effect as a whole and enhance the game interest. Is possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
At least a part of the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines in the first control state and the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines in the second control state are different. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, the advance notice effect executed in the first control state and the advance notice effect executed in the second control state are different, that is, either the first control state or the second control state. Also provided a notice effect that is not executed by each other. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the first control state and the second control state, and it is possible to diversify the game production as a whole and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or Reference Invention 1-2.
The number of advance notice effects that can be executed in the first control state is larger than the number of advance notice effects that can be executed in the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. , It is possible to determine a number of advance notice effects larger than those in the second control state as the determination target of the advance notice effect determination unit. As a result, the number of advance notice effects and the number of advance notice effects to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit are changed according to the control processing amount (control burden) of the game effect control unit to diversify the advance notice effects and promote the game. It becomes possible to increase. In addition, it is possible to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Further, in the second control state in which the amount of processing of the effect control processing executed by the game effect control unit is large, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance performance determination unit is smaller than that in the first control state in which the amount of processing is small. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the game production control unit as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port.
As the control processing controlled by the game effect control unit, the ball entry advance notice effect control process executed when the ball enters the start port, and the change start advance notice effect control process executed at the start of the variation display of the identification information. Have,
The second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed.
The first control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is executed when the ball enters the starting port, and the first control state is set to the entering ball. Time notice This is a predetermined time when the effect control process is not being executed. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entry is not executed, the advance notice effect that is not determined when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the advance notice effect control process at the time of entry is performed. It becomes possible to make a decision target. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control load), enhance the game interest, and optimize the control process (game effect control process) of the game effect control unit.

The notice effect at the time of entry is executed on the condition that the ball enters the starting port, and the change display of the identification information based on the entry is started. Not a condition. Therefore, the advance notice effect at the time of entering the ball may start before the start of the variable display of the identification information based on the entry, and such a advance advance notice effect (pre-reading advance notice) or advance advance notice effect (advance notice) may be performed. Notice). Further, the variation start advance notice effect executed by the variation start advance notice effect control process is a advance notice effect executed on condition that the variation display of the identification information based on the entry is started. Therefore, the notice effect at the start of the change is a notice effect executed during the execution of the change display of the identification information based on the entry.

Further, when the number of the advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than that in the first control state, whether or not the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the game effect control. Depending on the amount of processing, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. In addition, when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not being executed and the amount of processing of the game effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the number of advance notice effects to be determined, which is excessive for the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production (game production) without imposing a load and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port.
As the control processing controlled by the game effect control unit, the ball entry control process executed when the ball enters the start port, the variation start notice effect control process executed at the start of the variation display of the identification information, and the change start advance notice effect control process. Have,
The second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is being executed.
The first control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is set to a predetermined time when the change start advance notice effect control process is executed at the start of the change display of the identification information, and the first control state is set to the change start time. It is a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process is not executed. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the change start advance notice effect control process is not executed, the advance notice effect that is not determined when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the change start advance notice effect control process is performed. It becomes possible to make a decision target. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control burden of the game effect control unit), enhance the game interest, and optimize the effect control process.

Further, when the number of the advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than that in the first control state, whether or not the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is being executed, that is, the game effect control. It is possible to change the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process of the unit, and to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Further, when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is not being executed and the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit increases the amount of the advance notice effect, which causes an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the notice production and enhance the game entertainment without spending time.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
The first control state is a predetermined time when the special game is being executed.
The second control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the special game is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing of the game effect control unit is small is set to a predetermined time during the execution of the special game, and the processing amount of the effect control process of the game effect control unit is large. The second control state, which is often used, is a predetermined time when the special game is not executed (for example, a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification information, a predetermined time during the control process related to the variable display of the identification information, etc.). As a result, during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a notice effect different from that when the special game is not executed, and it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special game. For example, the advance notice effect that can be executed during the special game is different from the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display of the identification information, and the advance notice effect can be diversified.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
A first time state in which a predetermined time is set as the variation display time of the identification information and a second time state in which a variation display time shorter than the first time state can be set as the variation display time of the identification information are set. Equipped with a possible variable display time setting unit
The first control state is set to a predetermined time in the first time state.
The second control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time in the second time state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is a predetermined time in the second time state that can take a short fluctuation display time, and the first control state is a predetermined time in the first time state that can take a long fluctuation display time. It is the time. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed in the first time state where the long variable display time is easy to be selected, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed in the second time state where the short variable display time is easy to be selected. It is possible to make a decision target for a notice effect that is not decided. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control burden of the game effect control unit), enhance the game interest, and optimize the effect control process.

Further, the second control state may be the first time state, and the first control state may be the second time state. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit.

Further, a probability setting unit that can be set to a predetermined probability (first probability) or a higher probability (second probability) higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result is provided, and the second control is provided. The state may have a high probability, and the first control state may have a predetermined probability. Further, the first control state may have a high probability, and the second control state may have a predetermined probability. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit.

In addition, a ball entry port (variable start port) that can be changed to the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect, and the first frequency state (low). A frequency state (low base state) and a second frequency state (high frequency state, high base state) in which the ball enters the ball entry port (variable start port) more frequently than the first frequency state can be set. A ball frequency setting unit may be provided, the second control state may be the second frequency state, and the first control state may be the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be the first frequency state, and the first control state may be the second frequency state. This also makes it possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. ..

Moreover, you may combine some or all of these. Specifically, the second control state may be the second time state and the high probability and the second frequency state, and the first control state may be the first time state and the predetermined probability and the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be the second time state and the high probability and the second frequency state, and the second control state may be the first time state and the predetermined probability and the first frequency state. Further, the second control state may be set to the second time state and the second frequency state, and the first control state may be set to the first time state and the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be set to the second time state and the second frequency state, and the second control state may be set to the first time state and the first frequency state. Further, the second control state may be set to the high probability and first frequency state, and the first control state may be set to the predetermined probability and first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be set to the high probability and second frequency state, and the second control state may be set to the predetermined probability and first frequency state. Also with these, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. ..

(Reference Invention 2)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game production control unit that performs a predetermined production control process,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
The game effect control unit has a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the advance notice effect to be executed, and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit can execute the advance notice effect along with the variable display of the identification information.
At least, there are a first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is larger than the predetermined amount.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing executed by the game effect control unit is large, the processing amount of the effect control processing is smaller than in the second control state. , It is possible to reduce the number of advance notice effects to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit of the game effect control unit.

As a result, it is possible to change the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process, and to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. In addition, when the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines is increased to diversify the advance notice effect without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number, and the advance notice to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state. It is possible to set the number of effects to a second predetermined number, which is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced in the second control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is large, and the advance notice effect determination unit is in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small. It is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be decided, and it is possible to diversify the game effects without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2.
The number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is the same in the first control state and the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of game effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, that is, the number of playable game effects can be the same in both the first control state and the second control state. It will be possible. As a result, when the processing amount of the effect control process is large (second control state), even if the number of game effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, the number of determinable advance notice effects is not reduced. , It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3.
The maximum number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is the same in the first control state and the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, the maximum number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, that is, the maximum number of playable game effects that can be determined is the same in both the first control state and the second control state. It becomes possible. As a result, when the amount of effect control processing is large (second control state), even if the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, the maximum number of game effects that can be determined is not reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-4.
The game effect control unit is characterized in that the advance notice effect determination unit performs the advance notice effect determination process based on the start of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination process by the advance notice effect determination unit at least based on the start of the variable display of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the amount of processing of the effect control process when starting the variable display of the identification information. Here, "execution based on the start of the variable display of the identification information" is executed based on the start of the variable display of the identification information, and even if it is performed before the start of the variable display of the identification information. It may be performed after the start, or at the same time as the start.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-5.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
As the effect control process, there is a ball entry control process that is executed based on the ball entry into the start port.
The second control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is being executed, and the first control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a state in which the ball entry control process is executed based on the ball entering the starting port is set as a second control state, and a state in which the ball entry control process is not executed is defined as a state in which the ball entry control process is not executed. The first control state is set. When the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the ball entry control process, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, and the ball entry control process is not executed. Occasionally, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed, it is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.

As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is changed depending on whether or not the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the processing amount of the effect control process, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit. Can be prevented from becoming excessive. In addition, when the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not being executed and the amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the advance notice effect to be determined, thereby putting an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production without making a call and enhance the entertainment of the game.

(Reference Invention 3)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game production control unit that performs a predetermined production control process,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
The game effect control unit has a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the advance notice effect to be executed, and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect is composed of a plurality of advance notice effect types having different production modes, and each of the advance notice effect types is composed of one or a plurality of advance notice effects.
The advance notice effect execution unit can execute the advance notice effect along with the variable display of the identification information.
At least, there are a first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is larger than the predetermined amount.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is the number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized by being less than.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing executed by the game effect control unit is large, compared to the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing is smaller than in the second control state. , It is possible to reduce the number of advance notice effect types to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit of the game effect control unit.

As a result, it is possible to change the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process, and prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. .. In addition, when the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect determination unit increases the number of advance notice effect types to be determined, thereby diversifying the advance notice effect without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number. ..

According to such a gaming machine, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number, and the advance notice effect determination unit is determined in the second control state. It is possible to set the number of advance notice production species to a second predetermined number, which is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced in the second control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is large, and the advance notice effect is determined in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small. It is possible to increase the number of advance notice production types to be decided by the department, and it is possible to diversify the advance notice production without imposing an excessive load on the game production control unit and enhance the game interest. Here, the "first predetermined number" is 2 or more, and the "second predetermined number" is 1 or more.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2.
When the game effect is determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state, a predetermined specific advance notice effect type is determined.
The advance notice effect execution unit is characterized in that it executes a advance notice effect belonging to the specific advance notice effect type.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is large, the advance notice effect type that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit can be set as a specific advance notice effect type. As a result, in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small, it is possible to execute a plurality of advance notice effects having different notice effect types, and in the second control state, the advance notice effects belonging to a specific advance notice effect type are executed. Make it possible. Further, when the processing amount of the effect control process is large, it is possible to fix the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit and prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Become.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3.
The number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is the advance notice to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized in that it is less than the number of advance notice productions belonging to the production type.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is large, the advance notice effect determination unit reduces the number of determinable advance notice effect types and belongs to the determinable advance notice effect species. It is also possible to reduce the number of advance notices. Further, in the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect to be executed from the plurality of advance notice effect types and the plurality of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type, while the second control state. In some cases, even if the number of advance notice effects is less than that of the first control state, the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type is also smaller than that of the first control state, and the advance notice effect to be executed is determined.

As a result, when the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, both the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit and the advance notice effect belonging to the advance notice effect type are reduced, so that the game effect control unit is affected. It is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessive. Here, it is sufficient that the advance notice effect type to be determined in the second control state has at least one advance notice effect type in which the number of the advance notice effects to which the number belongs is reduced.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4.
When the advance notice effect determination unit determines to execute the predetermined advance notice effect type in the first control state, the predetermined advance notice effect is determined from a plurality of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type.
When the advance notice effect determination unit determines to execute the predetermined advance notice effect type in the second control state, it is characterized in that a predetermined specific advance notice effect is determined.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, the advance notice effect determination unit reduces the number of determinable advance notice effect types and belongs to the determinable advance notice effect species. It is possible to fix the advance notice effect. As a result, when the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, if the advance notice effect determination unit determines the advance notice effect type, the advance notice effect to be executed is determined accordingly, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit is increased. It is possible to prevent it from becoming excessive.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-5.
The game effect control unit is characterized in that the advance notice effect determination unit performs the advance notice effect determination process based on the start of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination process by the advance notice effect determination unit at least based on the start of the variable display of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the amount of processing of the effect control process when starting the variable display of the identification information. Here, "execution based on the start of the variable display of the identification information" is executed based on the start of the variable display of the identification information, and even if it is performed before the start of the variable display of the identification information. It may be performed after the start, or at the same time as the start.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-6.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
As the effect control process, there is a ball entry control process that is executed based on the ball entry into the start port.
The second control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is being executed, and the first control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a state in which the ball entry control process is executed based on the ball entering the starting port is set as a second control state, and a state in which the ball entry control process is not executed is defined as a state in which the ball entry control process is not executed. The first control state is set. When the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the ball entry control process, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, and the ball entry control process is not executed. Occasionally, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed, it is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.

As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is changed depending on whether or not the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the processing amount of the effect control process, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit. Can be prevented from becoming excessive. In addition, when the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not being executed and the amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the advance notice effect to be determined, thereby putting an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production without making a call and enhance the entertainment of the game.

(Reference Invention 4)
In a conventional gaming machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on the ball entering the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. There was one that performed a jackpot game that opened the winning opening. In addition, there is a possibility that a game effect (notice effect, reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the variable display of the symbol, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol. The possibility of stop display (big hit reliability) was shown by (for example, JP-A-10-57583).

In addition, as game effects (notice effect, reach effect, character effect, etc.), there are a plurality of game effects having different execution modes, and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, the player's game interest is enhanced when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, and the game interest is further enhanced when the jackpot is advantageous. In a gaming machine as described above, when a game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, the game entertainment taste is enhanced, but on the other hand, the production mode of the game production is uniform and there is a possibility that the game entertainment taste is deteriorated. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a gaming effect that enhances the interest of the gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entry port to enter the ball, and a special game execution unit.
A gaming machine provided with a possibility suggestion notification unit that suggests the feasibility of the special game.
The possibility suggestion notification unit
A possibility suggestion image color setting unit for setting the color of the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game from a plurality of colors corresponding to the feasibility of the special game.
The possibility suggestion image display unit for displaying the possibility suggestion image with the color set by the possibility suggestion image color setting unit, and the possibility suggestion image display unit.
After the possibility suggestion image is displayed by the possibility suggestion image display unit, an effect image color display unit that displays an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image. , Is characterized by having.

According to such a game machine, the possibility suggestion notification unit suggesting the feasibility of the special game can change the color of the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game from a plurality of colors of the special game. The possibility suggestion image color setting part that is set according to the feasibility, the possibility suggestion image display part that displays the possibility suggestion image with the set color, and the possibility suggestion image are displayed in the set color. After that, an effect image color display unit for displaying an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image is provided. This makes it possible to enhance the taste of the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game. That is, after the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game is displayed, the possibility is displayed by displaying an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image corresponding to the display mode of the possibility suggestion image. Since other effects suggesting the feasibility of the special game change depending on the display mode of the suggestion image, it is possible to enhance the taste of the suggestion image.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
After the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color, a production image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a color corresponding to the first color of the possibility suggestion image, and the possibility suggestion. After the image is displayed in the second color, there is a case where an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a color corresponding to the second color of the possibility suggestion image.
After the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, it is more possible to display an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image in a color corresponding to the second color of the possibility suggestion image. After the sex suggestion image is displayed in the first color, the special game is executed as compared with the case where the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the color corresponding to the first color of the possibility suggestion image. It is characterized by suggesting a high possibility.

According to such a game machine, the possibility suggestion image color setting unit has at least a first color and a second color as colors that can be set, and the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color. Later, when the effect suggestion image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the color corresponding to the first color, and after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second. It has a case of displaying in a color corresponding to a color and a case of displaying in a color corresponding to the color. Then, it is assumed that the case where the special game is displayed in the second color is more likely to be the feasibility of the special game than the case where the special game is displayed in the first color. As a result, changes in the display mode between the possibility suggestion image and other production images are diversified, and it is possible to raise interest in which color the possibility suggestion image is displayed and to enhance the interest of the game. ..

Further, in addition to such an aspect, after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color, an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is made to correspond to the first color of the possibility suggestion image. When the possibility does not change (there is no change to the corresponding color), and after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed as the second possibility suggestion image. There may be a case where the color corresponding to the color does not change (there is no change to the corresponding color).

In this case, after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, a production image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a color corresponding to the second color of the possibility suggestion image. However, after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image does not change to the color corresponding to the second color of the possibility suggestion image (to the corresponding color). It may be suggested that the feasibility of the special game is higher than that in the case where there is no change in the above. Similarly, in the case where the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color and then the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the color corresponding to the first color of the possibility suggestion image. However, after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color, the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image does not change to the color corresponding to the first color of the possibility suggestion image (to the corresponding color). It may be suggested that the feasibility of the special game is higher than that in the case where there is no change in the above.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2.
The possibility suggestion image that first displays the color suggesting the feasibility of the special game is displayed in a size larger than the effect image that is displayed later in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image. It is characterized by being done.

According to such a gaming machine, the possibility suggestion image that is displayed in a predetermined color first is displayed in a size larger than the effect image that is displayed in a color corresponding to the predetermined color later. As a result, it is possible to make the possibility suggestion image that can trigger the color change of the effect image stand out, and to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the possibility suggestion image and the effect image.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2.
The effect image displayed in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a size larger than that of the possibility suggestion image previously displayed in the color.

According to such a gaming machine, the effect image displayed later in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a size larger than the possibility suggestion image displayed in the color first. As a result, it is possible to make the effect image whose color changes according to the color of the possibility suggestion image stand out, and to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the possibility suggestion image and the effect image.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is an effect of displaying the possibility suggestion image in a predetermined color and then displaying an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and further, the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game. It is possible to enhance the taste. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, in the first control state, the possibility suggestion notification unit makes the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image correspond to the color of the possibility suggestion image after the possibility suggestion image is displayed. The effect control displayed in color may be executed and may not be executed in the second control state.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
In the second control state, the possibility suggestion notification unit makes the effect suggestion image different from the possibility suggestion image correspond to the color of the possibility suggestion image after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a predetermined color. It is characterized in that the advance notice effect displayed in a different color is executed and is not executed in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. By providing a notice effect, it is possible to enhance the taste of the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

Further, other reference inventions are described.
A privilege granting unit (for example, a special game execution unit) that grants a privilege (for example, a special game),
A privilege grant determination unit (win / fail determination unit) that determines whether or not to grant the privilege (win / fail), and
Based on the determination result of the privilege grant determination unit, the possibility suggestion notification unit that suggests the determination result, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The possibility suggestion notification unit
A possibility suggestion element setting unit that sets the display color of the possibility suggestion element that suggests the possibility that the privilege is given from a plurality of kinds of colors corresponding to the possibility.
A possibility suggestion element display unit for displaying the possibility suggestion element in the display color set by the possibility suggestion element setting unit,
After the possibility suggestion element is displayed by the possibility suggestion element display unit, an effect image element different from the possibility suggestion element is displayed in a display color corresponding to the display color of the possibility suggestion element. Image element display and
It may be characterized by having.

Further, other reference inventions are described.
A privilege granting unit (for example, a special game execution unit) that grants a privilege (for example, a special game),
A privilege grant determination unit (win / fail determination unit) that determines whether or not to grant the privilege (win / fail), and
Based on the determination result of the privilege grant determination unit, the possibility suggestion notification unit that suggests the determination result, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The possibility suggestion notification unit
A possibility suggestion element setting unit for setting a character image element suggesting the possibility of being given the privilege from among a plurality of types of character image elements imitating different types of characters in accordance with the possibility.
A possibility suggestion element display unit for displaying the character image element of the type set by the possibility suggestion element setting unit, and
After the character image element is displayed by the possibility suggestion element display unit, the effect image element display unit that displays an effect image element different from the character image element in a display color corresponding to the type of the character image element. When,
May have.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the taste of the character image element that suggests the possibility (reliability) that a privilege (special game) is given. That is, after the character image element suggesting the possibility of giving the privilege is displayed, the character image element is displayed by displaying the effect image element different from the character image element in accordance with the display mode of the character image element. Since the effect of suggesting the determination result of the privilege grant determination means changes depending on the display mode, the taste of the character image element can be enhanced.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered, and a special game execution means.
It is a gaming machine provided with a gaming effect executing means capable of executing a gaming effect according to a variable display of identification information.
As the game effect, there is a progress effect in which the effect can be progressed by displaying a predetermined effect image in stages (progress effect in which the display stages of the effect are set to a plurality of stages).
The effect image is composed of a combination of a progress image indicating that the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image and a specific effect execution image indicating execution of a specific effect different from the progress effect.
In the progress effect, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image, and when the specific effect execution image is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the effect The specific effect is executed without the image progressing and being displayed on the next effect image.
When the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image, the combination of the displayed effect images is different.

According to such a game machine, as a game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, there is a progress effect in which the displayed effect image is progressively displayed in a stepwise manner. The effect image displayed in this progress effect is composed of a combination of a progress image indicating that the progress is displayed on the next effect image and a specific effect execution image indicating execution of a specific effect different from the progress effect. .. Further, in a predetermined effect image in which these progress images and a specific effect execution image are combined, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image, and the specific effect execution image is displayed. Is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the specific effect shown in the specific effect execution image is executed without the effect image being progressively displayed on the next effect image. Further, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image, the combination of the progress image constituting the effect image and the specific effect execution image may be different combinations. There is.

As a result, when the effect image displayed in the progress effect is configured by combining the progress image and the specific effect execution image, and the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the progress is displayed on the next effect image, the effect image is displayed. , The combination of the progress image and the specific effect execution image can be a different combination. Then, by displaying the progress on the next production image of the production image of the progress production, the expectation is raised, and when the combination of the production images is changed, the expectation is further raised, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

When the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the progress image is displayed on the next effect image, the combination of the displayed effect images (the type of the progress image and the specific effect execution image) is the same as that of the previous effect image. It is only necessary that the combination (the type of the progress image and the specific effect execution image) is different, and when the progress is displayed on the next effect image, the combination of the displayed effect images is the same as the combination of the previous effect images. There may be times when the same combination is obtained. Further, in the case of displaying the progress a plurality of times, it is sufficient that the combination changes when a part of the progress is displayed, and it is not necessary to change to a different combination each time. Of course, it may change to a different combination each time. Further, "the combination of the progress image constituting the effect image and the specific effect execution image is a different combination" means that one or more progress images constituting the effect image, one or more specific effect execution images, and one or more specific effect execution images. A part of them may be different from the progress image and the specific effect execution image constituting the previous effect image. It may have the same progress image and / or specific effect execution image as the previous effect image.

Further, the display mode may be different depending on whether the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode or the specific effect execution image is displayed in the predetermined display mode, or the same display mode may be used. It may be. Each has a predetermined display mode. For example, when a progress image is selected between a progress image and a specific effect execution image that compose the effect image, the selected image is surrounded by a red circle, the background is displayed in a different color, or the process is progressed. It is possible to show the player that the progress image has been selected / determined in a predetermined display mode by operating the display characters and characters of the image, changing the display size, and the like. In addition, when selecting a specific effect execution image, similarly, the surrounding of the selected image is surrounded by red circles, the background is displayed in a different color, and the display characters and characters of the specific effect execution image are displayed. It is possible to show the player that the specific effect execution image has been selected / determined in a predetermined display mode by operating or changing the display size.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
The specific effect is a character effect that displays a predetermined character and indicates whether or not the character achieves a predetermined purpose, and when the character achieves a predetermined purpose, the result of variable display of the identification information is displayed. It is characterized in that the specific result is obtained.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific effect executed when the specific effect execution image is displayed in a predetermined display mode is a character effect that produces an effect as to whether or not the predetermined character achieves the purpose. When the purpose is achieved, the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, and the special game is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the character production through the progress production, gradually raise the expectation of the player, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
It has a plurality of the specific effect execution images having different display modes, and has a plurality of the specific effect execution images having different display modes corresponding to the plurality of the specific effect execution images.
The effect image is characterized in that it is composed of a combination of the progress image and one or a plurality of the specific effect execution images selected from the plurality of specific effect execution images.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a plurality of images having different display modes as specific effect execution images, and has a plurality of specific effects having different display modes corresponding to the plurality of specific effect execution images. Then, the effect image in the progress effect is composed of a combination of the progress image and one or a plurality of specific effect execution images. As a result, different specific effect execution images can be displayed depending on the effect image of the progress effect. Therefore, the expectation is raised by the displayed specific effect execution image, and when the combination of the effect images is changed, the expectation is further increased. It has made it possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

The “plurality of specific effects having different display modes” refers to an effect in which different characters appear, an effect in which even the same character achieves different purposes, and the like.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3.
In the plurality of specific effects, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the identification information will be the specific result differs depending on which of the specific effects is executed.
In the progress effect, when the predetermined specific effect execution image is displayed in a predetermined display mode among the plurality of the specific effect execution images, the specific effect image is not displayed in progress on the next effect image, and the specific effect is displayed. It is characterized in that the specific effect corresponding to the execution image is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the identification information will be a specific result differs depending on which specific effect is executed among the specific effects corresponding to the specific effect execution image. Will be done. Then, among the plurality of specific effect execution images, the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect execution image displayed in the display mode of the calligraphy wisdom is executed. As a result, different specific effect execution images are displayed depending on the effect image of the progress effect, and the possibility of obtaining a specific result differs depending on the specific effect execution image in the predetermined display mode. Therefore, which specific effect execution image is selected. It was possible to raise the sense of expectation and enhance the interest of the game when the combination of the production images changes.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
In the progress effect, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the effect image is progressed and displayed on the next effect image,
As the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image displayed by the progress display, the result of the variation display of the identification information is more than the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image displayed before the progress display. Is characterized by having the specific effect execution image indicating that there is a high possibility that the specific result will be obtained.

According to such a gaming machine, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the next effect image is displayed in the progress effect, the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image is the previous effect. It corresponds to a specific effect in which the result of variable display of the identification information is more likely to be the specific result than the specific effect execution image constituting the image. As a result, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the next effect image is displayed, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the specific result. In addition, the greater the number of times the progress is displayed in the next production image, the higher the expectation of the player for the specific result.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-5.
In the progress effect, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the effect image is progressed and displayed on the next effect image,
As the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image displayed by the progress display, the result of the variable display of the identification information is larger than the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image displayed before the progress display. Is not displayed, which indicates that the specific effect execution image is unlikely to be the specific result.

According to such a gaming machine, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the next effect image is displayed in the progress effect, the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image is the previous effect. The specific effect execution image indicating that the result of the variable display of the identification information is less likely to be the specific result than the specific effect execution image constituting the image is not displayed. As a result, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the next effect image is displayed, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the specific result. In addition, the greater the number of times the progress is displayed in the next production image, the higher the expectation of the player for the specific result.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-6.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is characterized by being the progress effect.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the first control state, and further, the preference of the progress effect that suggests the feasibility of the special game. Can be increased. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the progress effect may be executed in the first control state and not executed in the second control state.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-8 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-6.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The possibility suggestion notification unit is characterized in that the progress effect is executed in the second control state and the progress effect is not executed in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. By providing a notice effect, it is possible to enhance the taste of the progress effect that suggests the feasibility of the special game. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Yet another reference invention is
It is a gaming machine that can execute a specific production in which the production stages are set to multiple stages.
The specific effect is
When a plurality of preview images are displayed during the production of a certain stage and then the production of the certain stage progresses to the production of the next stage, there is a combination of the plurality of preview images displayed during the production of the next stage. It is configured to be different from the combination of multiple preview images displayed during the stage production.
The plurality of notice images include a progress suggestion image and a transition effect content suggestion image, and when the progress suggestion image is displayed in a predetermined mode, the process proceeds to the next stage of the effect, while the transition effect content suggestion image. Is displayed in a predetermined mode, the suggested effect may be executed without proceeding to the next stage effect.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 5, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

(Reference Invention 6)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered, and a special game execution means.
It is a game machine equipped with a game production execution means capable of executing a game production.
The game effect includes a specific advance effect that notifies the feasibility of the special game and an additional effect that is executed together with the specific advance effect.
As the specific notice effect, it has three or more specific notice effects.
The specific advance notice effect can be individually executed according to the variable display of the identification information, and a plurality of the specific advance notice effects can be executed according to the variable display of the identification information.
In either case, the specific advance notice effect is individually executed according to the variable display of the identification information, or a plurality of the specific advance notice effects are executed according to the variable display of the identification information. Along with the execution of the specific notice effect, the common additional effect is executed,
The larger the number of the specific advance notice effects executed in association with the variable display of the identification information, the higher the possibility that the special game can be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a specific advance notice effect for notifying the feasibility of the special game and an additional effect to be executed together with the specific advance notice effect. There are three or more types of specific advance notice effects, and each of the three or more specific advance notice effects can be executed individually, and a plurality of specific notice effects can be executed. In the case of doing so, a common additional effect is executed together with the specific advance effect. In addition, the greater the number of specific advance notice effects to be executed, the higher the possibility that the special game can be executed. As a result, the player only needs to know the number of specific advance notice effects to be executed, and it becomes easy to grasp the feasibility of the special game. In addition, since the specific advance notice effect is executed with a common additional effect, the player can easily grasp which effect is the specific advance notice effect and can easily grasp the feasibility of the special game. Become.

The predetermined condition can be satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port. Further, when a plurality of advance notice effects are executed along with the variable display of the identification information, a common additional effect is executed corresponding to each of the plurality of advance notice effects. Further, the types of the three or more specific advance notice effects may be three, four, or five. Further, for example, in the case of three pieces, the first specific notice effect, the second specific notice effect, and the third specific notice effect are used, and the production modes of the first to third specific notice effects are different. In addition, the execution period of these first to third specific notice effects shall be different. Further, these first to third specific notice effects are display images (display image effects) executed on the display screen (liquid crystal display screen), and are executed in association with the execution of these first to third specific notice effects. The additional effect to be performed is a game effect executed by a game member (for example, a movable member, an LED, another display unit, a vibrating member, etc.) different from the display screen on which the first to third specific notice effects are executed.

Further, in one or a plurality of specific advance notice effects among the first to third specific advance notice effects (for example, the first specific advance notice effect), an effect mode in which the display shape is the same but the display color is different (first display color, It may have a second display color). In this case, the larger the number of specific advance notice effects executed along with the variable display of the identification information, the higher the possibility that the special game can be executed (if the numbers are the same, the same jackpot reliability is shown). At the same time, when the number of specific advance notice effects is the same, it is more likely that the display color of the specific advance notice effect is higher in the case of the second display color than in the case of the first display color as the feasibility of the special game. It may be a thing.

Further, when a plurality of specific advance notice effects are executed along with the variable display of the identification information of 1, the additional effect is executed along with each of the plurality of specific advance notice effects to be executed. For example, when three specific notice effects of the first to third specific notice effects are executed along with the variable display of the identification information 1, the additional effects are the identification of each of the first to third specific notice effects. It is executed at least three times in response to the advance notice effect. In this case, it may be executed at least three times, and the additional effect may be executed three times or more. For example, the additional effect may be executed a plurality of times in association with any of the specific notice effects, or the additional effect may be executed in response to the other notice effect without corresponding to any of the specific notice effects. Alternatively, the additional effect may be performed independently.

Further, the additional effect may be an effect of notifying the execution (start) of each specific advance notice effect. For example, the specific advance notice effect may be executed after the additional effect is executed. As a result, when the additional effect is executed, the player recognizes that the specific advance effect is executed (additionally) after that, and recognizes that the jackpot reliability becomes high, and the special game (big hit) Raise expectations for. Further, when the additional effect is executed, it may be confirmed that the specific advance effect is executed after that. Further, when the additional effect is executed, there may be a case where the specific advance notice effect is executed and a case where the specific advance effect is not executed. Further, the display mode of the additional effect may have a plurality of display modes (display color, display shape, display location, etc. are different), and the possibility that the specific advance notice effect is executed after that may be different. Further, when the additional effect is a specific display mode, it may be determined that the specific advance effect is executed after that.

Further, the additional effect may be continuously executed during the entire period of the execution period of the specific advance notice effect. As a result, when the additional effect is executed for a long time, the effect executed together with the additional effect can be easily recognized as the specific advance notice effect.

The plurality of specific advance notice effects may be effects in which a common specific character appears (uses). In addition to a plurality of specific notice effects, a large number of notice effects (game effects) are executed along with the variable display of the identification information. Therefore, a plurality of specific notice effects having different display modes are associated with a specific character. As a result, the player can easily grasp which is a plurality of specific advance notice effects, and can easily understand the playability. Further, this makes it possible to easily grasp how many specific advance notice effects have been executed along with the variable display of the identification information 1, and to raise the expectation for the special game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
The specific advance notice effect is characterized in that it is executed at different timings according to the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, three or more specific advance notice effects are executed at different timings according to the variable display of the identification information. As a result, when a plurality of specific advance notice effects are executed, the start timings of the plurality of specific advance notice effects are not the same, so that it is possible to easily grasp the execution of the player, the specific advance notice effect, and the additional effect. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the feasibility of the special game.

Further, "three or more specific notice effects are executed at different timings according to the variable display of the identification information" can be exemplified by the following cases. In the case of having the first to third specific notice effects, the first specific notice effect is a game effect that starts one second after the start of the variable display of the identification information, and the second specific notice effect starts the variable display of the identification information. The game effect starts 3 seconds after the start, and the third specific notice effect is a game effect that starts 5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the identification information. Further, as another example, the first specific advance notice effect is a game effect that starts immediately after the start of the variable display of the identification information (during the variable display of all (three) effect symbols), and the second specific advance notice effect is It is a game effect that starts based on the stop display of the first identification information (effect symbol), and the third specific notice effect is that the second identification information (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (and). It may be a game effect that starts based on a reach mode (for example, “7 ↓ 7”).

Further, the start timings of the first to third specific notice effects may be different, and a part of the execution period of the specific notice effects may overlap, or the end timings of one or a plurality of specific notice effects match. You may. Of course, the execution periods of the first to third specific notice effects may not overlap at all, and may be executed in another period during the variable display of the identification information of 1. Further, it is a game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and has a notice effect other than the first to third specific notice effects, and the notice effect is the execution timing of one or a plurality of specific notice effects. May be the same as. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the specific advance notice effect executed in association with the variable display of the identification information of 1 may be 1, 2, may be 3, may be 3, or may be 4 or more. There is also. Further, when a plurality of specific advance notice effects are executed along with the variable display of the identification information 1, the plurality of specific advance notice effects to be executed may be executed at different timings. When the specific advance notice effect of 1 is executed along with the variable display of the identification information of 1, the specific advance notice effect of 1 is regardless of the type of the specific advance notice effect (for example, the first to third specific advance notice effects). , It may be executed at the same timing during the variable display of the identification information. Of course, even when the specific advance notice effect of 1 is executed along with the variable display of the identification information of 1, different execution timings (start timings) are set according to the type of the specific advance notice effect, and the identification information It may be executed (started) at different timings during the variable display.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2.
If the number of the specific advance notice effects executed is the same as the variable display of the identification information, the possibility of the special game being the same regardless of the type or combination of the specific advance notice effects is the same. It is characterized by showing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the number of executions is the same with the variable display of the identification information, the specific advance notice effect to be executed is not limited to the type or combination of the specific advance notice effects. The same possibility shall be shown as the feasibility of the special game. As a result, the player does not need to grasp the special game executable feasibility of each specific advance notice effect when a plurality of specific advance notice effects are executed, and does not need to grasp the special game execution feasibility by the combination. By simply recognizing the number of specific advance notice effects to be executed, it is possible to easily understand the degree of feasibility of special game execution.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 6, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 7)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered, and a special game execution means.
An input means for the player to input a predetermined value, and
A game production execution means that can execute a game production, and
A gaming machine provided with a display screen for displaying the gaming effect.
It has a frame image composed of a display frame displayed on the display screen and an image in the frame displayed in the display frame.
As the game production
A still effect that displays the frame image along at least a part of the outer edge of the display screen, and
A first movement effect of moving the frame image by a first amount while maintaining the display form of the display frame and the image in the frame, and
The static effect, the first, which comprises a second moving effect of moving the frame image by a second amount while maintaining the display form of the display frame and the image in the frame based on the input to the input means. It is characterized in that the movement effect and the second movement effect are executed in a predetermined order.

According to such a gaming machine, it has an input means for a player to input a predetermined value, and a frame image including a display frame displayed on a display screen and an image in the frame displayed in the display frame. .. Further, as a game effect, a static effect of displaying the frame image along at least a part of the outer edge of the display screen and a first amount of moving the frame image while maintaining the display form of the display frame and the image in the frame. It has one movement effect and a second movement effect of moving the frame image by a second amount while maintaining the display frame and the display form of the image in the frame based on the input to the input means. Then, the stationary effect, the first moving effect, and the second moving effect are executed in a predetermined order. As a result, a plurality of game effects are executed in a predetermined order, and the frame images are moved and displayed in various modes, so that it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Further, the predetermined condition can be satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port. Further, the game effect selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the game effect based on the input to the input means, and the game effect can be executed according to the variable display of the identification information.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
It is characterized in that the second movement effect is executed after the first movement effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when the stationary effect, the first moving effect, and the second moving effect are executed in a predetermined order, the second moving effect is executed after the first moving effect. As a result, the effect of moving the frame image by the first amount while maintaining the display form and the effect of moving the frame image by the second amount while maintaining the display form based on the input to the input means are executed in order. It will be possible to diversify the production and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2.
The second movement amount is larger than the first movement amount.

According to such a gaming machine, the second movement amount is assumed to be a larger movement amount of the frame image than the first movement amount. As a result, since the effect of moving the frame image more greatly is executed based on the input to the input means, it is possible to diversify the game effect and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, as another aspect, the second movement amount may be smaller than the first movement amount. According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the movement amount of the frame image is smaller than the first movement amount in the second movement amount. As a result, based on the input to the input means, the effect that the frame image moves smaller (the movement ends, the movement may be stopped) is executed, so that the game effect is diversified and the game is enjoyed. Can be increased.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-3.
Based on the input to the input means, the movable member is operated and the second movement effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the movable member is operated and the second movement effect is executed based on the input to the input means. That is, it is assumed that the movable member operates and the frame image moves by the second movement amount by the input to the input means. As a result, the effect of moving the frame image is executed along with the movement of the movable member based on the input to the input means, so that it is possible to diversify the game effect and enhance the game interest.

Further, as the frame image, there are a plurality of frame images having different display modes of the in-frame image, and at least one of the first movement effect and the second movement effect has the display mode of the in-frame image. It may be characterized in that it is an effect of exchanging and displaying a plurality of different frame images.

As a result, the plurality of frame images are switched while maintaining the display form by executing the first movement effect or the second movement effect, so that the player can display the frame image having the frame image in any display mode. Expecting that it will be done, it will enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a result of the switching display, a game effect (reach effect) relating to the image within the frame of the finally displayed frame image may be executed. Further, the feasibility (big hit reliability) of the special game may differ depending on the type of the image in the frame of the frame image. Further, the switching display of the frame image may be started by the second movement effect (input to the input means), or the switching display of the frame image may be stopped.

Further, as the frame image, there is a third movement effect in which a plurality of frame images having different display modes of the frame images are displayed, and a plurality of the frame images having different display modes of the frame images are interchanged and displayed. It may be characterized by.

As a result, in addition to the first movement effect and the second movement effect, the third movement effect is further provided, so that the game effect can be diversified and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 8)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
Identification information display means that displays the identification information in a variable manner and stops it based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered, and a special game execution means.
A game production execution means that can execute a game production, and
A first display device having a first display screen capable of executing the game effect, and
A gaming machine including a second display device having a second display screen capable of executing the game effect.
The game effect includes a first special effect executed on the first display screen and a second special effect executed on the second display screen.
The first special effect and the second special effect are said to be performed in a corresponding relationship.
In both special effects execution periods in which the first special effect and the second special effect are being executed,
If the first special effect and the second special effect are executed until the first period with an error in the effect occurring, the first special effect and the second special effect are simultaneously performed from the first period. It is characterized in that it shifts to the second period later and eliminates the error in the production of the first special effect and the second special effect.

According to such a gaming machine, a first display device having a first display screen and a second display device having a second display screen are provided, and a first special effect is executed on the first display screen. 2 Perform the second special effect on the display screen. In addition, the first special effect and the second special effect are considered to be performed in a corresponding relationship with each other, and during both special effect execution periods in which both the first special effect and the second special effect are executed, the first effect is performed. If the first special effect and the second special effect are executed until the first period with an error in the effect, the first special effect and the second special effect are simultaneously shifted to the second period to reduce the error in the effect. Eliminate.

As a result, even if there is an error in the execution mode of the first special effect and the second special effect that are executed in a corresponding relationship with each other, when the first period arrives, the first special effect and the first special effect and the first By simultaneously shifting the two special effects to the second period, it is possible to forcibly eliminate the error in the effects. In addition, by eliminating the production error at predetermined timings in both special production execution periods, it is possible to prevent the production error between the first special production and the second special production from becoming excessive, and to display a plurality of displays. It is possible to make the special effect performed on the screen a natural and highly tasteful effect.

In addition, the first special effect and the second special effect have an error (deviation, deviation) in the effect (execution, execution mode, progress, progress, progress) between the first special effect and the second special effect. One of the special effects is executed (progressed) until the first stage of the effect (first execution stage, first progress stage, predetermined stage), and the other of the first special effect and the second special effect is the effect. If a situation occurs that has not been executed until the first period of
The first special effect and the second special effect are simultaneously shifted to the second period after the first period, and errors (deviations, deviations) in the effects of the first special effect and the second special effect. It may be characterized by eliminating (consistency, matching).

Further, the predetermined condition can be satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port. Further, the game effect selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the game effect based on the input to the input means, and the game effect can be executed according to the variable display of the identification information. Further, a first display device, a second display device separate from the first display device, and a first special effect are executed by the first display device, and a second special effect is executed by the second display device. And said. Not limited to such an aspect, the first special effect may be executed in the first display area on the display screen of the specific display device, and the second special effect may be executed in the second display area. In addition, the first special effect and the second special effect are displayed in a corresponding relationship (having a relevance in the effect). Further, the first special effect and the second special effect may have different display modes or the same display mode as long as they are related to each other in terms of effect.

In addition, "During the execution period of both special effects in which the first special effect and the second special effect are being executed,"
One of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed until the first period of the effect, and the first special effect and the second special effect are executed while there is an error in the effect between the first special effect and the second special effect. If the other side of the special effect is not executed until the first period of the effect,
The first special effect and the second special effect are simultaneously shifted to the second period after the first period to eliminate the error in the effect of the first special effect and the second special effect. " , "One (or both) of the first special effect and the second special effect was executed until the first period of the effect, with no error in the effect between the first special effect and the second special effect. In this case as well, the first special effect and the second special effect are simultaneously shifted to the second period after the first period. "

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1.
As the game effect, there is a definite effect to be executed when the identification information is stopped and displayed.
The execution period of both the first special effect and the second special effect is executed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the identification information.
In the second period, the final effect is executed in both the first special effect and the second special effect, so that an error in the effect is eliminated (consistency is achieved and matching is achieved). It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, as a game effect, there is a definite effect to be executed when the identification information is stopped and displayed, and both special effect execution periods extend over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the identification information. It is made feasible. Then, the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the final effect is executed by both the first special effect and the second special effect in the second period, thereby eliminating the error between the first special effect and the second special effect. As a result, at the timing when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the final effect is executed to match the effects of the first special effect and the second special effect, and the special effect executed on a plurality of display screens is not uncomfortable and has a taste. It is possible to produce a highly effective production.

Similar to the above, even if there is no difference in production between the first special effect and the second special effect in the first period, the first special effect and the second special effect in the second period. It is assumed that the final effect is executed in any of the above, and the first special effect and the second special effect are consistent in the effect. As a result, by executing a definite production that eliminates the production error between the first special production and the second special production at a predetermined timing (regularly), the production error becomes excessive. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to achieve consistency in the production between the first special effect and the second special effect executed in different display devices (display areas).

Further, a display control unit for controlling the first display device and the second display device is provided, and when the variation display time of the identification information elapses, the display control unit stops the symbol output from the main control unit (or the sub control unit). It is supposed to receive a signal. The time when the variation display time of the identification information elapses is set as the first period, and when the first period is reached, the display control unit receives the symbol stop signal, and the display control unit receives the symbol stop signal and is based on the reception of the symbol stop signal. And the confirmation effect (design confirmation effect) execution signal is transmitted to the second display device, and the confirmation effect (design confirmation effect) is executed in both the first special effect and the second special effect.

Further, the final production of the first special production can be referred to as the "first special production final production", and the final production of the second special production can be referred to as the "second special production final production".

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
Equipped with an input means for the player to perform a predetermined input,
The first special effect is an effect that progresses with input to the input means.
The second special effect is characterized in that it is an effect that progresses with the input to the input means.

According to such a gaming machine, an input means for inputting a player is provided, and both the first special effect and the second special effect are effects that proceed with the input to the input means. As a result, since both the first special effect and the second special effect are effects that change depending on the input to the input means, the effect of noise or the like causes the effect between the first special effect and the second special effect. There is a risk of error. As a result, by eliminating such an error in the effect at a predetermined timing in both special effect execution periods, it is possible to prevent the error in the effect between the first special effect and the second special effect from becoming excessive. It is possible to make the special effect executed on a plurality of display screens a natural and highly tasteful effect.

In addition, a special symbol display means that fluctuates and stops the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
An effect symbol display means that fluctuates and stops the effect symbol based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
A game production execution means that can execute a game production, and
A special symbol display device that displays the special symbol, and
A first display device having a first display screen capable of displaying the effect symbol and executing the game effect, and
A second display device having a second display screen capable of executing the game effect, and
A first control unit (main control unit) that executes display control of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device, and
A second control unit that executes display control of the effect symbol displayed on the first display device, the game effect displayed on the first display device, and the game effect displayed on the second display device. (Sub-control unit, design control unit) and
It is equipped with an input means for the player to input a predetermined value.
The game effect includes a first special effect executed on the first display screen and a second special effect executed on the second display screen.
An input signal indicating that there was an input to the input means is input to the second control unit, and the input signal is input to the second control unit.
The second control unit may advance the first special effect and the second special effect based on the input signal from the input means.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7b Production symbol display area (Production symbol display area), 8 Production symbol, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 39 Specific area , 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a effect 1st special figure hold indicator, 103b effect 2nd special figure hold indicator

Claims (3)

Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered, and a special game execution means.
It is a game machine equipped with a game production execution means capable of executing a game production.
The game effect includes a specific advance effect that notifies the feasibility of the special game and an additional effect that is executed together with the specific advance effect.
As the specific notice effect, it has three or more specific notice effects.
The specific advance notice effect can be individually executed according to the variable display of the identification information, and a plurality of the specific advance notice effects can be executed according to the variable display of the identification information.
In either case, the specific advance notice effect is individually executed according to the variable display of the identification information, or a plurality of the specific advance notice effects are executed according to the variable display of the identification information. Along with the execution of the specific notice effect, the common additional effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the larger the number of the specific advance notice effects executed in association with the variable display of the identification information, the higher the possibility that the special game can be executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific advance notice effect is executed at different timings according to the variable display of the identification information. When the number of the specific advance notice effects executed is the same as the variable display of the identification information, the possibility of the special game being the same as the feasibility of the special game is the same regardless of the type or combination of the specific advance notice effects. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

Images